2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual
-
Upload
ital-stuff -
Category
Documents
-
view
4.077 -
download
0
Transcript of 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 1/253
2004
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 2/253
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 3/253
A000A01A-AAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL OWNER
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP CODE
DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
CITY STATE ZIP CODE
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 4/253
OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A02O-AAT
OperationMaintenanceSpecifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipAs a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 5/253
A010A02A-AAT
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.
Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 6/253
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.
A050A04A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 7/253
A070A01A-AAT
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 8/253
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:
WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
!
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 9/253
A100A03A-AAT
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of
an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.
To find the closest authorized deale
1-800-826-CARS
A100A01L A100A02L A
A
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 10/253
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 11/253
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
B250A03O-AAT
B25
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 12/253
1. Multi-Function Light Switch2. Instrument Cluster 3. Horn and Driver's Airbag4. Ignition Switch5. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch6. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)7. Hazard Warning Light Switch8. Digital Clock9. Rear Window Defroster Switch10.Audio System (If installed)
11.Passenger's Airbag12.Hood Release Lever
13.Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)14.Traction Control System Switch (If installed)15.Cruise Control Switch (If installed)16.Steering Wheel Tilt Lever 17.Ashtray18.Parking Brake Lever 19.Shift Lever (If installed)20.Power Outlet21.Cigarette Lighter 22.Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel
23.Glove Box
CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 13/253
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
B255A03O-AAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-42.
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level
Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light
Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
Malfunction Indicator LightSeat Belt Reminder Light and Chime
Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)
Cruise Indicator (If installed)
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)
4WD System Warning Light (If installed)
Traction Control Off Indicator Light (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 14/253
1
Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2
Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door .............................................................................. 1-4Power Windows .......................................................... 1-10Seats ........................................................................... 1-11Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-18Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-24Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) system................. 1-31Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-38Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-42Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-48Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-50Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-56Mirror........................................................................... 1-61Hood Release ............................................................. 1-72Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-75Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-78
Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-94Audio System.............................................................. 1-96Antenna..................................................................... 1-123
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 15/253
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limitedranty may not cover damage to thsystem and any performance problemare caused by the use of fuels contamethanol or fuels containing MTBE (M
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.gen Content 2.7% weight.)
B010B01A-AAT
What About Gasohol?
Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-
ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.
B010A02A-AAT
Use Unleaded Gasoline
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.
If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause thecatalytic converter to become ineffective andthe emission control system to malfunction.This can also result in increased maintenanceexpense.
To avoid accidental use of leaded fuel, the largernozzle used with leaded gasoline at service
stations cannot be inserted into the fuel tankopening of your Hyundai.
CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle
shut off when refueling.
o The fuel cap must be tightened at least3 clicks, otherwise " " light mayilluminate.
B010C01A-AAT
Use of MTBE
Hyundai recommends that fuels contMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) shou
be used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicformance and produce vapor lock ostarting.
B010D01A-AAT
Do Not Use Methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol)
not be used in your Hyundai. This type can reduce vehicle performance and dacomponents of the fuel system.
!
B010A01O
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 16/253
FEATURES OF YOUR
KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI
B010F01A-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries
If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
B010E01A-AAT
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent deposit
formation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.
B020A01S-AAT
During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)
No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durabi lity of
your Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).
o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,
or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.
o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.
B030A01A-AAT
B0
For greater convenience, the same keyates all the locks in your Hyundai. How
because the doors can be locked withoutcarrying a spare key is recommended inyou accidentally lock one key inside the
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 17/253
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
4 DOOR LOCKS
!
B040A01A-AATB030C01Y-AAT
ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH
(If installed)
Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.
B030C01L
WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerou
fore you drive away (especially ifare children in the car), be sure that doors are securely closed and lockthat the doors cannot be openedthe inside. This helps ensure thdoors will not be opened accideAlso, when combined with the puse of seat belts, locking the doorskeep occupants from being ejectedthe car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always loand avoid oncoming traffic.
B030B01A-AAT
Record Your Key Number
A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.
B030B01B
FEATURESOFYOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 18/253
FEATURES OF YOUR
B040B01O-AAT
Locking, unlocking front doors with a
key
o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.
NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds.
B040B01O
LOCK UNLOCK
B040C02O-AAT
Locking From the Outside
(Driver's side)
The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch
driver's door to the "LOCK" posonly the driver's door can be lock
o If your vehicle is equipped with c
door locking system, the door wlock if the key is left in the ignition swhen the front doors are closed.
o When locking the door this way, beful not to lock the door with the igkey left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, aremove the ignition key, close aldows, and lock all doors and taiwhen leaving your vehicle unatte
B040C01O
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 19/253
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6
The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.
B045C02O-AAT
Locking From the Outside
(Passenger's side)
B040C01O-D
B040D01O-AAT
Locking From the Inside
(Driver's side)
To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position.
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the
driver's door to the "LOCK" position,only the driver's door can be locked.
o When the door is locked, the red mark onthe switch is not visible.
o The driver's door can be opened by
pulling the inside door handle even if thelock switch is depressed.
HSM362
UNLOCKLOCK
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch o
passenger's door to the "LOCK"tion, all doors can be locked.
o If your vehicle is equipped with c
door locking system, the door wlock if the key is left in the ignition swhen the front doors are closed.
o When locking the door this way, beful not to lock the door with the igkey left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, aremove the ignition key, close aldows, and lock all doors and taiwhen leaving your vehicle unatte
FEATURESOFYOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 20/253
FEATURES OF YOUR
B040E03A-AAT
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock
Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-protec-tor" rear door lock assembly. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.
To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " "position and close the door. Move the lever tothe opposite direction of " " position whennormal door operation is desired.
If you wish to be able to open the door from theoutside, pull the outside door handle to its upposition.
B045D01O-AAT
Locking From the Inside
(Passenger's side)
To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position. When this is done, neither the outsidenor the passenger's inside door handles can beused.
NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" posi-tion, all doors can be locked.
o When the door is locked, the red mark on
the switch is not visible.
HSM362-D
HSM170-1
LOCK
UNLOCK
B040G02O-AAT
Central Door Locks (If installed)
The central door locking switch is locateddriver's arm rest. It is operated by depreither the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" of the doswitch.
NOTE:o When pushing the "LOCK" of the d
door lock switch, all vehicle doolock. If any door is open when the sis depressed, the door will remain lwhen closed.
o When pushing the "UNLOCK" o
switch, all vehicle doors will unlo
B04
1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 21/253
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
B075B01O-AAT
Armed Stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arsystem as described below.
1) Remove the ignition key from the iswitch.
2) Make sure that the engine hood and taare closed and latched.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitterkeyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, thsignal lights will blink once to indicate th
system is armed.
LOCKUNLOCK
PANIC
B070A01A-AAT
(If installed)
This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal litghts.
B070F01O-AAT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)
Locking doors
1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal
lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-ter.
2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.
NOTE:If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds.
FEATURESOFYOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 22/253
U SO OU
B075C01O-AAT
Alarm Stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.
1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.
2) The tail gate is opened without using thetransmitter or the ignition key.
3) The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the turn signal lights willblink continuously for 27 seconds (This hap-pens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock thedoor or tail gate using the transmitter or theignition key.
CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.
NOTE:o If any door, tail gate or engine hood
remains open, the system will not bearmed. If this happens, rearm the systemas described above.
o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushing the"LOCK" button on the transmitter, thesiren will sound once to indicate that thesystem is armed.
CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm
may be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.
!
!
B075D01O-AAT
Disarmed Stage
The system will be disarmed by usintransmitter or the ignition key.
The driver's door is unlocked by depronce the "UNLOCK" button on the transIf you wish to unlock all doors, press theLOCK" button on the transmitter again wseconds.
Whenever the step above is completed, tsignal lights will blink twice to indicate thsystem is disarmed.
If any door, tail gate or engine hood is not owithin 30 seconds, the system will be rea
B075E01O-AAT
Panic Warning
1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans2. At the same time, the siren will sound a
turn signal lights will blink for 30 sec3. To turn off the system, push the "P
button again on the transmitter.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 23/253
110 POWER WINDOWS
B060A03Y-AAT
The power windows operate when the ikey is in the "ON" position. The main sw
are located on the driver's armrest and cthe front and rear windows on both sidesvehicle. The windows may be opened pressing the appropriate window switcclosed by pulling up the switch. To opwindow on the driver's side, press the swhalfway down. The window moves as lothe switch is operated. To fully open the dwindow automatically, press the switcdown. In automatic operation, the windofully open even if you let go of the switch. Tat the desired opening, pull up and releaswitch.
(1)
Open
C
B070E02HP-AAT
Replacing the battery
When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not
light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032
Replacement instructions:
1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.
2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facing
down), then insert it in the transmitter.
HSM327
B070E02A-1
Screwdriver
Case
Battery
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 24/253
SEATS
!In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch(2)is provided on the armrest of the driver's door.
To disable the power windows, press the win-dow lock switch. To revert to normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.
NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can no
longer be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.
WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingwindow.
(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.
(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for their
safety.
HSM050HSM441-A
(2)
Open
Close
B080A01A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS
!WARNING:
Never attempt to adjust the seat whvehicle is moving. This could result iof control or an accident which may death, serious injury, or property da
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 25/253
112
!
!B080B02A-AAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward
To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.
B080B01O
B080C01A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.
WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury ievent of a collision or a sudden stop
the driver and passenger seatbacks salways be in an upright position whivehicle is in motion. The protectionvided by the seat belts and airbagsfrontal collision may be reduced scantly when the seatbacks are recThere is greater risk that the drivepassenger will slide under the seawhich may result in serious injury if aoccurs when the seatbacks are recThe seat belt cannot provide full protto an occupant if the seat back is rec
B080C01O
WARNING:
To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 26/253
!WARNING:
o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident, the headrest should be ad-
justed so the top of the headrest is at thesame height as the top of the occupant'sears. The use of a cushion that holds thebody away from the seatback is notrecommended.
o Do not operate the vehicle with the head-rests removed as severe injury to anoccupant may occur in the event of anaccident. Headrests may provide pro-tection against severe neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.
B080E01O-AAT
Lumbar Support Control
(Driver's seat only) (If installed)
To adjust the lumbar support, turn the hanthe inboard side of the seat. To increaamount of lumbar support, pull the levward. To decrease it, push the lever towarear.
1. Minimum support2. Maximum support
B080D02A-AAT
Adjustable Headrests
Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob.
HSM365
B0
Lock knob
12
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 27/253
114
!
B080F01A-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)
To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the front knob forward or rear-ward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion, turn the rear knob forward or rear-ward.
B080F01O
B090A01Y-AAT
POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If installed)
The driver's seat can be adjusted appropriatelyby using the control knobs on the left side of theseat. Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily control thesteering wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.
CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the same time.
WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat whilethe vehicle is moving. This could resultin loss of control or an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or property dam-age.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag.
B090B01Y-AAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear
Pull the control knob forward or backw
move the seat forward or backward desired position. Release the knob and thwill remain at that position.
1. Seat Back Reclining Control Knob2. Seat Cushion Forward, Rearward and
Adjusting Control Knob
B0
!1
2
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 28/253
!B090D01Y-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
Rotate the upper portion of the control knob
forward or backward to recline the seatback tothe desired position. Release the control knoband the seatback will remain in that position.
WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injthe event of a collision or a sudden
both the driver's and passenger's seashould remain in an upright positionthe car is in motion. The protectionvided by the seat belts and airbags mreduced significantly when the seatare reclined. There is a greater risk thseat occupants will slide under theresulting in serious injury if a crash owhen the seatbacks are reclined. Thbelt cannot provide full protection occupant if the seat back is reclined
B090C01Y-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
Move the front portion of the control knob up or
down to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.
B090C01O B090D01O
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 29/253
16
!
B080G01FC-AAT
UNDER TRAY (If installed)
The tray is located under the front passenger's
seat. It is opened by up and pulling forward.
WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the trayshould be kept closed when the car is inmotion.
HSM189
B100A02Y-AAT
SEAT WARMER (If Installed)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the front
seats during cold weather. With the ignition key inthe "ON" position, push either of the switches towarm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.
NOTE:o The seat warmer will not operate if am-
bient temperature is higher than82.4°F(28°C) ± 3.5°F(3.5°C).
o If the seat warmer doesn't works whenambient temperature is lower than75.2°F(24°C), it must be checked at au-thorized dealer.
B085A01O-BAT
REAR SEAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, push the sefolding lever toward the headrest, and rit after the desired seatback angle is achWhen you recline the seatback to desirsition, always be sure it has locked into po
CAUTION:When reclining the seatback, you sadjust the seatback folding lever
standing.
B340G01O
H
!
Seatbackfolding lever
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 30/253
NOTE:o Before folding the seatback, place the
rear seat belt buckles in the buckle clipson the seatback. This will prevent theseat belt buckles from becoming cov-ered by the seat cushion when it isreturned to the seating position.
o The rear seat belt buckles must be re-moved from the buckle clips by pressingrelease button when in use.
4. Hook the securing loop under the seaion to the hanger on the backside seatback.
5. Insert the headrests between the seand the seat cushion.
6. To return the seatback to its normal popush the seatback folding lever and rethe above procedure.
o When you return the seatback to its position, always be sure it is lockeposition by pulling and pushing on thethe seatback.
B085B01O-AAT
Folding Rear Seatback and Seat
Cushion
For greater convenience, the entire seatbackand seat cushion may be folded down and up.
1. Remove the headrests.2. Pull strap to fold up the seat cushion.3. Push and hold the seatback folding lever (1)
inward, then push down the seatback.
B080D01O
HSM293-A B0
(1)
Strap
Buckle clips
Hanger
Securing loop
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 31/253
18 SEAT BELTS
B150B03Y-AAT
Infant or Small Child
All 50 states have child restraint lawsshould be aware of the specific requiremyour state. Child and/or infant safety seatbe properly placed and installed in the reaInformation about the use of these res
begins on page 1-24.
!!B140A01B-AAT
REAR SEAT WARNING
For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback.
WARNING:o The purpose of the fold-up rear seat
cushion and the fold-down rear seatback is to allow you to carry more objectsthan could otherwise be accommodated.Never allow passengers to sit on thecargo area while the car is moving. Thisis not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use when theseat back is folded down.This could result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or a suddenstop. Objects should not extend higherthan the top of the front seatbacks.This could allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage during sud-den stops.o Make sure that the headrests are prop-
erly fixed in place to minimize the risk ofsevere injury in case of an accident.
o When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down,be careful not to damage the seatbeltwebbing or buckle. In addition, do notallow the seatbelt webbing or buckle toget caught or pinched in the rear seat.
B080P01O
B150A01S-AAT
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
All occupants of the vehicle must weaseat belts at all times. Note that this vis equipped with a Supplemental Res(Airbag) System as discussed begon page 1-31. The seat belts must bein conjunction with the supplemairbag system. State laws require thator all occupants of the vehicle usebelts. The possibility of increased injseverity of injury in an accident wincreased if this elementary safety prtion is not observed. In addition, follo
other instructions provided in this se
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 32/253
!B150C02A-AAT
Larger Children
Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.
B150D01A-AAT
Pregnant Women
The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snugly
as possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.
B150E01A-AAT
Injured Person
A seat belt should be used when an person is being transported. When this essary, you should consult a physici
recommendations.
B150F01A-AAT
One Person Per Belt
Two people (including children) shouldattempt to use a single seat belt. Thisincrease the severity of injuries in caseaccident.
B150G01A-AATDo Not Lie Down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the evan accident and to achieve maximum effness of the restraint system, all passeshould be sitting up and the front seats sbe in an upright position when the car is mA seat belt cannot provide proper protethe person is lying down in the rear seat ofront seat is in a reclined position.
WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.
NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrained
in the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.The restraint must be appropriate for yourchild's height and weight. Check the labelon the child restraint for this information.See page 1-24.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 33/253
20
!
B160A01A-AAT
CARE OF SEAT BELTS
Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are not
damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.
WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-21.
B160B01A-AAT
Periodic Inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.
B160C01A-AAT
Keep Belts Clean and Dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. become dirty, they can be cleaned by umild soap solution and warm water. Bleac
strong detergents or abrasives should used because they may damage and wthe fabric.
B160D01A-AAT
When to Replace Seat Belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or asseshould be replaced if the vehicle hasinvolved in an accident. This should be
even if no damage is visible. Additionaltions concerning seat belt operation shodirected to your Hyundai Dealer.
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 34/253
! WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the lockedposition when the vehicle is moving.
o The misadjustment of height of theshoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.
B180A01A-AAT
SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with
Emergency Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the reand insert the metal tab into the buckle.will be an audible "click" when the tab locthe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the length only after the lap belt portion is ad
manually so that it fits snugly around youIf you lean forward in a slow, easy motiobelt will extend and let you move around. is a sudden stop or impact, however, the block into position. It will also lock if you try forward too quickly.
NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedthe ignition key is in the "ON" positioseat belt warning light will flash anwarning chime will sound for approximsix seconds.
B170A04Y-AAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT
SHOULDER BELT
You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-
priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.
B170A01E
B180A01L
Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 35/253
22
!
NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergency
locking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.
WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-
tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.
o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.
o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passanger seat.
o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.
B190A01Y-AAT
SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear
Seat 3-Point System with Combination
Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt
Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, Hyundaistrongly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt
operation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-29.
WARNING:o Avoid wearing twisted seat be
twisted belt can't do its job as welcollision, it could even cut into yosure the belt webbing is straight antwisted.
o Be careful not to damage the belbing or hardware. If the belt webbhardware is damaged, replace it.
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 36/253
The seat belt is released by pressing the re-
lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.
B220A01A-AAT
SEAT BELTS (2-Point Static Type
(Center Rear Seat)
To Fasten Your Seat Belt
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insmetal tab into the locking buckle. There an audible "click" when the tab locks inbuckle. Check to make sure the belt is prlocked and that the belt is not twisted.
WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
B210A01L
!
B200A01A-AAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
B200A01L
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 37/253
24 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
!
B230A02O-AAT
Children riding in the car should sit in thseat and must always be properly restraminimize the risk of injury in an accident, sstop or sudden maneuver. According todent statistics provided by the National
way Traffic Safety Administration (NHchildren are safer when properly restraithe rear seats than in the front seat. children not in a child restraint should usof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint lawsshould be aware of the specific requiremyour state. Child and/or infant safety seatbe properly placed and installed in the reaYou must use a commercially availablerestraint system that meets the requiremthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a ctheir restraints are not properly securesmall children and babies, a child seat orseat must be used. Before buying a pachild restraint system, make sure it fits yoseat and seat belts, and fits your child. all the instructions provided by the maturer when installing the child restraint s
B220C01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
When you want to release the seat belt, press
the button in the locking buckle.
WARNING:The center lap belt latching mechanism isdifferent from those for the rear seat shoul-der belts. When fastening the rear seatshoulder belts or the center lap belt, makesure they are inserted into the correct buck-les to obtain maximum protection from theseat belt system and assure proper opera-
tion.
HSM372-A
B220B01A-AAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the length
must be adjusted manually so it fits snuglyaround your body. Fasten the belt and pull on theloose end to tighten. The belt should be placedas low as possible on your hips, not on yourwaist. If the belt is too high, it could increase thepossibility of your being injured in an accident.
HTB226
ShortenCorrect
Too high
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 38/253
!WARNING:
o Always make sure that the shoulder beltportion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer to thecenter of the vehicle may help provide agood shoulder belt fit. The lap belt por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt must alwaysbe positioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.
o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating height
so that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards and thatit is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.
o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.
o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.
WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a pe
arms while they are in a moving veas this could result in serious injthe child in the event of an accidensudden stop. Holding a child in a mvehicle does not provide the childany means of protection during andent, even if the person holding theis wearing a seat belt.
!!WARNING:
o A child restraint system must be placedin the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.
o Since a safety belt or child restraint sys-tem can become very hot if it is left in aclosed vehicle, be sure and check theseat cover and buckles before placing achild there.
o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the luggage compartmentor fasten it with a safety belt so that it willnot be thrown forward in the case of asudden stop or an accident.
o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passanger seat.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
26
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 39/253
26
B230C04O-AAT
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System
Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear luggage compartment floor.
To install the child restraint seat
Tetheranchor cover
Child RestraintHook Holder
B230B02O
This symbol indicates the location of each userready tether anchorage.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on th
luggage compartment floor.
B230B01E-AAT
Using a Child Restraint System
For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders for install-ing the child seat or infant seat.
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 40/253
!
B230D03E-AAT
Securing the Child Restraint Seat
the "ISOFIX" system
Some child seat manufacturers make seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or IScompatible child seats. These seats inclurigid or webbing mounted attachmentconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at sseating positions in your vehicle. This tchild seat eliminates the need to use seato attach the child seat for forward-facinseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided ivehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located
left and right outboard rear seating posTheir locations are shown in the illustThere is no ISOFIX anchor provided fcenter rear seating position.
B
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to secure
the seat.
WARNING:o To install the Child Restraint Seat, for
safety reasons the Seat should be posi-tioned rearmost with the seatback in avertical position, not reclined.
o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a child
restraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.
B230B01O-1Front of Vehicle
Tether StrapHook
ChildRestraintHookHolders
Rear luggage compartment floor
2. Route the child restraint seat strap over the
seatback.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
28
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 41/253
28
!WARNING:
If the child restraint seat is not ancproperly, the risk of a child being serinjured or killed in a collision grea
creases.
The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.
B230D02O-A
ISOFIXAnchor
ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator
Follow the child seat manufacturer's intions to properly install safety seats with ISor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the ISOFIX chstraint seat, assure that the seat is pr
attached to the ISOFIX and tether anAlso, test the safety seat before you plachild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Ato tug the seat forward. Check to seeanchors hold the seat in place.
HSM418-A
!WARNING:
o Do not install a child restraint seat at thecenter of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child sefety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.
o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.
o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.
o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 42/253
!
B230G01O-AAT
Installation on Outboard Rear Seats
WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Auto
Locking mode, the child restraintem can move when your vehicle tustops abruptly.
o Do not install any child restraint sin the front passenger seat. Shouaccident occur and cause the passside airbag to deploy, it could seinjure or kill an infant or child sea
an infant or child seat. Thereforeuse a child restraint system in thseat of your vehicle.
To install a child restraint system in the outboard
rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirelyfrom its retractor until a "click" is felt. This willengage the seat belt retractor automatic lockingfeature, which allows the seat belt to retract butnot extend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt totake up any slack. Make sure that the lap portionof the belt is tight around the child restraintsystem and the shoulder portion of the belt ispositioned so that it can not interfere with thechild's head or neck. Also, double check to besure that the retractor has engaged the Auto-
matic Locking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in theAutomatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.
After installation of the child restraint systto move it in all directions to be sure threstraint system is securely installed. If yoto tighten the belt, pull more webbing towaretractor. When you unbuckle the seat ballow it to retract, the retractor will automa
revert back to its normal seated passEmergency Locking usage condition.
NOTE:o Before installing the child restrain
tem in any seating position, reainstructions supplied by the chistraint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate scribed, have the system checked diately by your authorized Hyundai dB230G01L
B230F01A-AAT
Installation on Rear Seat Center Posi-
tion
Use the center seat belt for the rear seat tosecure the child restraint system as illustrated.After installation of the child restraint system,rock the child seat back and forth, and side toside to ensure that it is properly secured by theseat belt.If the child seat moves, readjust the length of theseat belt. Then, if equipped, insert the childrestraint tether strap hook into the child restrainthook holder and tighten to secure the seat.Always refer to the child restraint systemmanufacturer's recommendation before install-ing the child restraint system in your vehicle.
B230F01A
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
30
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 43/253
30
!
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.
1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module
WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to thecorrect position.
NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passe
pre-tensioner seat belts will be actin certain frontal collisions. Thetensioner seat belts can be actwith the airbags. The pre-tensione
be activated even if the seat belts abeing worn at the time of the col
o When the pre-tensioner seat belactivated, a loud noise may be hearfine dust, which may appear to be smay be visible in the passengerpartment. These are normal opeconditions and are not hazardou
o Although it is harmless, the finemay cause skin irritation and shoube breathed for prolonged periods.your hands and face thoroughly af
accident in which the pre-tensionebelts were activated.
B180B01O
1
2
3
Driver's airbag
Passenger'sairbag
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body.
B180B02A-AAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedwith the airbags.
HXG229
FEATURES OF YOUR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 44/253
(AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)
!B240A03F-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with a SuppleRestraint (Airbag) System. The indicatithe system's presence are the lettersAIRBAG" embossed on the airbag pad cthe steering wheel and the passenger'front panel pad above the glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags inunder the pad covers in the center steering wheel and the passenger's sidpanel above the glove box. The purposeSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver afront passenger with additional protectionused together with the seat belt, in cas
frontal impact.
WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.
All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.
o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.
o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.
B2
Driver's AirbagCAUTION:
o Because the sensor that activates theSRS airbag is connected with pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warn-
ing light on the instrument panel willblink for approximately 6 seconds afterthe ignition key has been turned to the"ON" position, and then it should turnoff.
o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofSRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after blinking forapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illumi-nates while the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat belts andSRS airbag system as soon as possible.
AIRBAG
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
32
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 45/253
WARNING:o No objects should be placed over o
the airbag modules on the steering winstrument panel, and the
passenger's panel above the glovbecause any such object could harm if the vehicle is in a crash senough to cause the airbags to d
o If the airbags deploy, they must placed by an authorized Hyundai d
o Do not tamper with or disconnecwiring, or other components of thsystem. Doing so could result in due to accidental firing of the airbaby rendering the SRS inoperative
o Do not install a child restraint systhe front passenger seat positichild restraint system must nevplaced in the front seat. The infachild could be severely injured orby an airbag deployment in caseaccident.
o Do not allow children to ride in thepassanger seat. If older children agers and older) must ride in theseat, make sure they are always prbelted and that the seat is moved ba
far as possible.
B240D01O
Side impact
Rear impact
Rollover
o Front airbags are not intended to deployin side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, airbags will notdeploy in frontal crashes below the de-ployment threshold speed.
o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.
!WARNING:
!
NOTE:Be sure to read information about the SRSon the labels provided on the backside ofthe sun visor and in the glove box.
WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed
to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver's and the passenger's threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore, your seatbelts must be worn at all times while thevehicle is in motion. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to likely cause signifi-cant injury to the vehicle occupants.
o The SRS is designed to deploy theairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30°from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle and will notdeploy in side, rear or rollover impacts.Additionally, the airbags will only de-ploy once. Thus, seat belts must be wornat all times.
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 46/253
B240B02A-AAT
SRS Components and Functions
The SRS consists of the following components:
- Driver's Airbag Module- Passenger's Airbag Module- Knee Bolster- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment.
B240B01L
The SRS service reminder indicator (Sthe instrument panel will blink for about onds after the ignition key is turned to theposition or after the engine is started, afterthe SRI should go out.
The airbag modules are located both center of the steering wheel and in thepassenger's panel above the glove boxWhen the SRSCM detects a considerabpact to the front of the vehicle, it will automadeploy the airbags.
B
Upon deployment, tear seams molded dinto the pad covers will separate undersure from the expansion of the airbags. Fopening of the covers then allows full inflathe airbags.
!o For maximum safety protection in all
types of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.
WARNING:
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
34
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 47/253
!CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.
WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there m
a loud noise and fine dust will bleased throughout the vehicle. Tconditions are normal and are noardous. However, the fine dust gated during airbag deploymentcause skin irritation. Wash your and face thoroughly with lukewarmand a mild soap after an accidewhich the airbags were deployed
B
Passenger's Airbag
!
B240B01O
Passenger's Airbag
A fully inflated airbag in combination with aproperly worn seat belt slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, thus reducing the
risk of head or chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility.
B240B03L
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 48/253
!
B990B04Y-AAT
Side Impact Airbag (If installed)
WARNING:
o The side impact airbag is supplemto the driver's and the passenger'belt systems and is not a substituthem. Therefore your seat belts muworn at all times while the vehiclemotion. The airbags deploy only itain side impact conditions senough to cause significant injury vehicle occupants.
Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact
airbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.
B990B02Y
Side asenso
!WARNING:
o The SRS can function only when theignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not come on, or continu-
ously remains on after flashing for about6 seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or after theengine is started, comes on while driv-ing, the SRS is not working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
36
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 49/253
!B240C01O-AAT
SRS Care
o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. The entire SRS system must beinspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer
in 10 years after the date that the vehicle wasmanufactured.
o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performed bya qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the airbag system may result inserious personal injury.
WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint sys
the front passenger seat positioA child restraint system must ne
placed in the front seat. The infababy could be severely injured or by an airbag deployment in caseaccident.
o Modification to SRS components oing, including the addition of any kbadges to the pad covers or motions to the body structure, caversely affect SRS performance anto possible injury.
o For cleaning the airbag pad coveronly a soft, dry cloth or one whic
been moistened with plain watervents or cleaners could adversely the airbag covers and proper dment of the system.
o No objects should be placed over othe airbag modules on the stewheel, instrument panel, and the passenger's panel above the glovbecause any such object could harm if the vehicle is in a crash senough to cause the airbags to i
o If the airbags inflate, they must placed by an authorized Hyundai d
HSM393
WARNING:o For best protection from the side impact
airbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,
both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-
vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the
side or near the side impact airbag.
o Do not use excessive force on the side ofthe seat.
o Do not place any objects over the airbagor between the airbag and yourself.
o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact air baginflates.
o To prevent unexpected deployment of
the side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury,avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key is on.
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 50/253
WARNING:o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.
o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.
o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that
this manual is transferred to the newowner.
o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.
o Do not replace the bumper or the bumperguard with the one other than the Hyundaigenuine parts. Otherwise, it can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto unexpected injury.
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 51/253
B260A03O-AAT
(2.4L, 2.7L)
B
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 52/253
1. Coolant Temperature Gauge2. Tachometer3. Turn Signal Indicator Light4. High Beam Indicator Light5. Speedometer6. Odometer / Trip Odometer7. Fuel Gauge8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)9. Cruise Indicator (If installed)10. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)11. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
12. Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag)Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
13. Seat Belt Warning Light14. Tail Gate Open Warning Light15. Door Ajar Warning Light16. Charging System Warning Light17. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)20. Low Fuel Warning Light21. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 53/253
B265A03O-AAT
(3.5L)
B26
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 54/253
1. Coolant Temperature Gauge2. Tachometer3. Turn Signal Indicator Light4. High Beam Indicator Light5. Speedometer6. Odometer / Trip Odometer7. Fuel Gauge8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)9. Cruise Indicator (If installed)10. 4WD System Warning Light (If installed)
11. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light12. Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag)
Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
13. Seat Belt Warning Light14. Tail Gate Open Warning Light15. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)16. Door Ajar Warning Light17. Charging System Warning Light18. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light19. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)20. Traction Control Off indicator Light (If installed)21. Low Fuel Warning Light22. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 55/253
B260B01A-AAT
SRS (Airbag) Service
Reminder Indicator (SRI)
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson and flashes for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after flashing forabout 6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started the engine,or if it comes on while driving, have the SRSinspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
B260D01A-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.
B260E02O-AAT
Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Chime
The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seatbelt is fastened when the ignition key is turnedfrom the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" andthe warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.
B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator Light
The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure Warning
CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stawhile the engine is running, serious edamage may result. The oil pressure ing light comes on whenever there is ficient oil pressure. In normal operatshould come on when the ignition sis turned on, then go out when the eis started. If the oil pressure warningstays on while the engine is running,is a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon a
safe to do so, turn off the engine and the oil level. If the oil level is low, fengine oil to the proper level and staengine again. If the light stays on wiengine running, turn the engine off diately. In any instance where the oistays on when the engine is runninengine should be checked by a Hydealer before the car is driven again
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 56/253
!
B260H02A-AAT
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid
Level Warning Light
The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a
distance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.
Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warning light
should come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.
B260J01A-AAT
Charging System Warning
The charging system warning light shouldon when the ignition is turned on, then when the engine is running. If the light st
while the engine is running, there is a mation in the electrical charging system. If thcomes on while you are driving, stop, turnengine and check under the hood. First,certain the generator drive belt is in placecheck the tension of the belt. Do this as on page 6-21 by pushing down on the cethe belt. And then have the system checyour Hyundai dealer.
B260B01B-AAT
Tail Gate Open Warning L
This light remains on unless the tail gcompletely closed and latched.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 57/253
B260L01Y-AAT
Door Ajar Warning Light
and Chime
The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the driver's side front door is not
completely closed.
NOTE:To remind you not to lock the key inside thecar, the warning light comes on wheneverthe key is in the "LOCK" position and a dooris open. The warning chime only soundswhenever the key is in the "LOCK" positionand driver's side front door is open. Thechime sounds and the light remains onuntil the key is removed from the ignition.
!
B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.
B260N01A-AAT
Malfunction Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that the
exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go out ina few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, ordoes not illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, take your car to yournearest authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.
B260P02Y-GAT
ABS Service ReminderIndicator (If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The
normal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.
WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking BBrake fluid level warning lights remainor come on while driving, there may
problem with E.B.D. (Electronic BrakeDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai as soon as possible.
B260C02O-GAT
Traction Control Indicato
Light (If installed)
The traction control indicator changes tion according to the ignition switch positiowhether or not the system is in operatioIt will also illuminate when the ignition turned to the "ON" position, but should after the engine starts. If the TCS indicatoon, take your car to your authorized Hdealer and have the system checkedsection 2 for more information about the
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 58/253
B270A01O-AAT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SO
The front and rear disc brake pads haveindicators that should make a high-psquealing or scraping noise when new paneeded. The sound may come and go
heard all the time when the vehicle is momay also be heard when the brake pepushed down firmly. Excessive rotor dawill result if the worn pads are not replaceyour Hyundai dealer immediately.
B270B01O-AAT
PARKING START WARNING SOU
If the vehicle driven at over 2mph(3km/h2~3 seconds, the warning chime will
continuously when the parking brake eng
B260T01O-GAT
4WD System Warning Light
(If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning lightwill come on and then go off in a few seconds.
B260Q03O-DAT
Cruise Indicator
(If installed)
The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise controlON´OFF switch is pushed on the steeringwheel.The indicator light does not illuminate when thecruise control ON´OFF switch is pushed again.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-75.
B265C01O-AAT
Traction Control Indicator
Lights (3.5 L only) (If installed)
The traction control indicators change opera-tion according to the ignition switch position andwhether the system is in operation or not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS.
CAUTION:If the 4WD system warning light ( ) blinkswhile driving, this indicates that there is amalfunction in the 4WD system. If this oc-curs, have your vehicle checked by an au-thorized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible.
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46 INSTRNMENT CLUSTER
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 59/253
!
B290A02A-AAT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.
The needle on the engine coolant tempegauge should stay in the normal range. If it across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and ssoon as possible and turn off the engineopen the hood and, after the engine has ccheck the coolant level and the water pumbelt. If you suspect cooling system trouble
your cooling system checked by a Hyundaias soon as possible.
B290A01O
B280A01A-AAT
FUEL GAUGE
The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity
is given in Section 9.
B280A01O
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 60/253
B310B04E-AAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
Odometer
Records the total distance the vehicle hasdriven.It is normal for a new vehicle to havodometer indicating less than 30 miles.
NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the oeter of any vehicle with the intent to cthe number of the odometer. The altemay void your warranty coverage.
B3
B330A03A-AAT
TACHOMETER
The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.
B330A01O
!
B300A01A-AAT
SPEEDOMETER
Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-
ters per hour (on the inner scale).
B300A01O
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
48 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITC
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 61/253
1. Odometer
The odometer records the total driving distancein miles or kilometers.
2,3 Trip odometer
Records the distance of 2 trips in miles orkilometers.TRIP A: first distance you have traveled fromyour origination point to a first destination.TRIP B: Second distance from the first destina-tion to the final destination.
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset
to 0.
B300A04O
B300A03O
Reset switch
B340A01A-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes thsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pupwards on the lever causes the turn signthe right side of the car to blink. As the completed, the lever will automatically rethe center position and turn off the turn sat the same time. If either turn signal indlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes does not blink, or does not go on at all, tha malfunction in the system. Check for a bout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai de
Function of Digital Odometer/
Trip Odometer
Pushing in the reset switch under the right sideof the speedometer when the ignition switch isturned "ON" displays the following sequence:
FEATURES OF YOUR
B340D01A AATB340B01A AAT B340C03A AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 62/253
B340D01A-AAT
High-beam Switch
To turn on the headlight high beams, pulever forward (away from you). The HighIndicator Light will come on at the same timlow beams, pull the lever back toward y
B340E01A-AAT
Headlight Flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the switchtoward you, then release it. The headlighbe flashed even though the headlight swin the "OFF" position.
B
B340B01A-AAT
Lane Change Signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.
The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.
B340C03A-AAT
Headlight Switch
To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-
tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.
NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.
Parking Light Auto Off
If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut
"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.
HSM039 HSM037
RIGHT
LEFT
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
50 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
B340G01L GAT B350A01A AAT B350B01O GAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 63/253
B340G01L-GAT
Auto Light (If installed)
To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If
you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.
B350A01A-AAT
The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:
1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation
NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.
HSM294
B350A01O-A
(1)
(2)
(3)
B350B01O-GAT
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the windshield washer, pull the washer lever toward the steering wheel.
the washer lever is operated, the wipersmatically make two passes across theshield. The washer continues to operatthe lever is released.
NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more th
seconds at a time or when thereservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be suwiper blades are not frozen to theprior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in wuse windshield washer antifreeze
B350
FEATURES OF YOUR
B390A01O-GATB350C01O-AATMi t Wi O ti
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 64/253
B390A01O GAT
Tail Gate Wiper And Washer Switc
1. : The washer fluid will be sprayethe rear window and the wiper op
while the rear window wiper baplaced in this position.
2.OFF3.INT : To use the intermittent wiper fe
place the rear window wiper barre"INT" position.
4.ON : When the point indicate "ON", thwindow wiper operates continu
B35
B350C01O AAT
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation
To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With the
switch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.It also can be varied by vehicle speeds withinsame time.
B350B02O-AB350C01O-A
Mist Wiper Operation
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-
wards.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
52 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMFRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
B370A01A-AATB360A04A-AAT B380A01Y-AAT
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 65/253
3 0 0
The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must make
such an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.
HSM034
360 0
(If installed)
To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.They will light when the headlight switch is in the
second position and the ignition key is in the"ON" position.
NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.
HSM289
380 0
The rear window defroster and heated orearview mirrors are turned on by pushingswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the
a second time. The rear window deautomatically turns itself off after about 1utes. To restart the defroster cycle, pushswitch again after it has turned itself off
FEATURES OF YOUR
DIGITAL CALENDARDIGITAL CLOCK
B400A01A-AAT B400B02O-GAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 66/253
NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.
There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.When this is done:
Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.
(If installed)
How to adjust the date & the time
1. Whenever "M" button is pushed, the "Y"MONTH", "DAY", "HOUR" and "MINblinks in order.
2. Adjust the date & the time by p" (UP)", " (DOWN)" button whyear/month/day/hour/minute each b
3. After adjusting the date & the time, pubutton once more and the adjustmcompleted.
NOTE:When the battery has been reconnec
charged, set the date and time as descabove. However, the first display moset on DEC 01.
HSM100
CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
54 POWER OUTLET
B500D08O-AAT
CIGARETTE LIGHTERINSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B420A01A-AATB410A01A-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 67/253
(If installed)
These are located in the quarter trim and center facia panel.
These supply 12V electric power to oelectric accessories or equipment onlythe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position
! CAUTION:Do not use the power outlet to coelectric accessories or equipment than those designed to operate on 12
BFor the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way
into its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.
B420A01O
The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.
B410A01O
FEATURES OF YOUR
B430A01A-GAT B440A01E-AAT
ASHTRAY DRINK HOLDER
B450A02O-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 68/253
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its grip. To remove the ashtray to empty or
clean it, press down on the spring-loaded tabinside the ashtray and pull i t all the way out. Theashtray light will only illuminate when the exter-nal lights are on.
B430A01O
Rear Ashtray
The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling it outby its top edge. To remove the ashtray to empty
or clean it, press down on the spring-loaded tabinside the ashtray and lift the ashtray upwardand pull it all the way out.
B440A01O
!
Front Drink Holder
The front drink holder is located on theconsole and may be used for holding c
cans.
WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink
ers. A spilled beverage that is vecan injure you or your passengers. Sliquids can damage interior trimelectrical components.
o Do not place objects other than cucans in the drink holder. The objecbe thrown out in the event of a sustop or an accident, possibly inthe passengers in the vehicle.
B
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
56 SUNROOF
B460A01Y-AAT
(If i ll d)B450B02O-AAT
R D i k H ld (If i ll d)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 69/253
!
(If installed)
Sun Shade
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidinshade which you can manually adjust tolight with the sunroof closed, or to block su
WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while dr
B
!Rear Drink Holder (If installed)
The rear drink holder is located on the rear mainconsole and may be used for holding cups. The
rear drink holder can be used by pushing andpulling it at its top edge.
CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhen not in use.
WARNING:Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. The objects can bethrown out in the event of a sudden stop oran accident, possibly injuring the passen-gers in the vehicle.
B450B01O
!
FEATURES OF YOUR
B460B01GK-GAT
O i th S f S tB460C01S-AAT
Tilti th S f S t
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 70/253
CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold
temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may
have accumulated on the guide rails.
!
!Opening the Sunroof System
The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. The
sunroof is moved to its fully open position bypushing the "OPEN" switch, and to stop at thedesired position, push in any switches (OPEN,CLOSE, UP, DOWN).To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" button.Release the button when the sunroof reachesthe desired position.
WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,
arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.
o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.
B460B01O
Tilting the Sunroof System
The sunroof can be tilted by pushing thebutton with sunroof closed. Release the
when the sunroof reaches the desired poTo close the sunroof, press the "DOWNton.
NOTE:After washing the car or after there isbe sure to wipe off any water that is osunroof before operating it.
B4
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58
B460D01O-GAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 71/253
3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench prwith the vehicle into the socket. This wcan be found in the vehicle's glove
4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or
terclockwise to close.
B4
Manual Operation of Sunroof
If the sunroof does not electrically operate:
1. Open the spectacle case.
2. Turn the hexagonal bolts counterclockwiseto remove the overhead console with asocket wrench.
B460D01O
B460D02O
FEATURES OF YOUR
INTERIOR LIGHT
B490A03Y-AAT
Interior LightB480B01O-AAT
Map Lighto ON
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 72/253
Interior Light
The interior courtesy light has three buttons.The three buttons are:
o DOORIn the " DOOR " position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.
B490A01O
Map Light
Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light produces a spot beam for
convenient use as a map light at night or as apersonal light for the driver and the passenger.
HSM046
With Sunroof Without Sunroof
In the "ON" position, the light stays ontimes.
!CAUTION
Do not leave this button pressed fextended period of time when the vehnot running.
o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays oftimes even though a door is open.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
60 GLOVE BOXSPECTACLE CASE
B500A01S-AATB491A02O-GAT
(If Installed)B500B01O-AAT
IlluminatedGloveBox
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 73/253
!WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.
o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.
o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.
B500A01O
UNLOCK LOCK
!
(If Installed)
HSM170
The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.
Push the end of the cover to open the spectaclecase.
WARNING:Do not keep objects such as sharp or un-suitable things inside the spectacle case.Such objects can be thrown out in the eventof a sudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.
With Sunroof Without Sunroof
Illuminated Glove Box
Opening the glove box will automatically tthe light when the multi-function switch is to the first/second position.
FEATURES OF YOUR
B510A01A-AAT
Manual Type
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
!B510B01Y-AAT
Electric Type (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 74/253
Manual Type
The outside rearview mirrors are equipped witha remote control for your convenience. It is
operated by the control lever in the bottom frontcorner of the window.Before driving away, always check that yourmirrors are positioned so you can see behindyou, both to the left and right sides, as well asdirectly behind your vehicle. When using themirror, always exercise caution when attempt-ing to judge the distance of vehicles behind oralong side of you.
B510A01O
CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice, donot attempt to break it free using the controlhandle or by manipulating the face of themirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the frozenmechanism or move the vehicle to a warmplace and allow the ice to melt.
!
The outside rearview mirrors can be adto your preferred rear vision, both direc
hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the leright sides.The remote control outside rearview switch controls the adjustments for botand left outside mirrors.
Electric Type (If installed)
B51
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62
B510D01Y-AAT
OUTSIDEREARVIEWMIRRORHEA!
To adjust the position of either mirror:
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 75/253
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEA
(If installed)
The outside rearview mirror heater is ac
in connection with the rear window defrosheat the outside rearview mirror glass, pthe switch for the rear window defrosterearview mirror glass will be heated for ding or defogging and will give you improvevision in inclement weather conditions. Puswitch again to turn the heater off. The orearview mirror heater automatically turnoff after 15 minutes.
!WARNING:
Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.
CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously
for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could
cause permanent damage. To remove
any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.
!
B510B02O
1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-priate perimeter switch as illustrated.
FEATURES OF YOUR
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
B510C01A-AAT
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEWB520A01A-AAT
Manual TypeB520B01O-GAT
Electric Type (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 76/253
!
MIRRORS
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them
toward the rear.The outside rearview mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.
WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearviewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause death, serious in-
jury or property damage.
yp
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selected
by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.
B510C01O
B520A01O
yp ( )
The electric type day/night inside rearvieror controls automatically the glare of hea
of the car behind you. Adjust the rearviewto the desired position.
B5
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
64
HOMELINK PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK MIRROR
B520C01L-GAT
(If installed)Automatic-Dimming Function
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 77/253
!
! CAUTION:o Make sure people and/or objects a
of the way of any garage doors or
you may be operating during thegramming procedures.o Keep original transmitters for po
future programming needs, or inyou sell the vehicle.
o In the event you do sell your vehicrecommended you erase yourgrammed HomeLink mirror butto
WARNING:Do not use HomeLink with any garageopener that lacks the safety stop averse feature as required by federal standards (includes garage doors factured before April 1, 1982), as doors can increase the risk of seriousor death. Call 1-800-355-3515 orwww.homelink.com for more inform
Indicator Light
( )
Your new vehicle may be equipped with anautomatic night vision mirror. During nighttime
driving, this feature will automatically detect andreduce dangerous rearview mirror glare.
Your new mirror also comes with an integratedHomeLink Universal Transceiver, which allowsyou to program up to 3 buttons on the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate, homelighting, etc. The mirror actually learns thecodes from your various existing transmitters.
To assist you during nighttime driving, yourmirror will automatically dim upon detectingglare from the vehicles behind you.
Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.
Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.
NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "on" position
each time the vehicle is started.
B520C01LB520C01L
Glare Detection
Homelink buttonsAutomatic-dimming mirrorfunction buttons
FEATURES OF YOUR
NOTE:If programming a garage door opener or
1. When programming the buttons for the firsttime, press and hold the two outside
3. If the garage door opener or other devwish to program is rolling-code equ
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 78/253
p g g g g pgate, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the "cycling" process to preventpossible motor burnout.
ProgrammingEnsure the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC"position to program and/or operate HomeLinksystem. It is also recommended that a newbattery be placed in the handheld transmitter ofthe device being programmed to HomeLink forquicker programming and accurate transmis-sion of the radio-frequency.Follow these steps to program your HomeLinkmirror:
HomeLink buttons ( , ), releasing whenthe indicator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). This procedure erasesthe factory-set default codes. Do not per-form this step when programming additional
transmitters.
B520C02L
Flashing
Flashing
2. Hold the transmitter of the device you wantto program 1 to 3 inches away from thebottom of the mirror. Simultaneously pressthe handheld transmitter button and theHomeLink button you wish to program. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first, thenrapidly, indicating successful programming.
B520C03L
Transmitter
1 ~ 3 i n c h
e s
Additional Programming for RollingDevices
For any rolling-code-equipped device; the steps additional below after completi"Programming" section. A second persomake the following steps easier.
1. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button device's motor head unit. The exact loand color of the button varies by pbrand, but is usually referenced in the downer's manual. Contact HomeLink800-355-3515 or www.homelink.cohelp.
2. Press and release the "learn" or "button on the device's motor head u
NOTE:You now have 30 seconds to initiate s
proceed to the "Rolling Code Programsection.
4. Repeat step 2 to program the remHomeLink buttons.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
66
Reprogramming a Single Hom
Button
Erasing Programmed Buttons3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press andrelease the programmed HomeLink button.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 79/253
Button
To program a device to HomeLink usHomeLink button previously trained, followsteps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinton. Do not release until step 4 hascompleted.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash(after 20 seconds), hold the handheldmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the botthe mirror.
3. Press and hold the transmitter buttonnecessary, press and "cycle," as desin the '"Gate Operator & Canadian Proming" portion of this text).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash
at first, then rapidly, indicating succprogramming. Release both buttons
Operating HomeLink
Simply press the appropriate HomeLink buttonto activate the trained product (garage door,security system, entry door lock, estate gate,
lighting, etc.). The original handheld transmit-ters may also be used at any time.
To erase the three HomeLink buttons, pressand hold the two outside buttons until the indica-tor light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).Release both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but can bereprogrammed.
B520C02L
Flashing
Press and release the same HomeLink but-ton a second time to complete the program-ming process. (Some devices may requireyou to press and release a third time tocomplete the programming.)
4. Now HomeLink mirror and rolling-code-equipped device should be synchronized.The remaining HomeLink buttons may nowbe programmed if this has not been donepreviously.
FEATURES OF YOUR
PARKING BRAKE
Gate Operator Programming & Cana-
dian Programming
B530A01A-AAT
TAIL GATE
B540A01FC-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 80/253
dian Programming
During programming, your handheld transmit-ter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and repress ("cycle") your
handheld transmitter every two seconds untilthe frequency signal has been learned. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly upon successful programming.
Accessories
For more information on HomeLink andHomeLink-compatible products, or to purchaseHomeLink accessories, call 1-800-355-3515or visit www.homeink.com.
Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the car. This also turns on the parking brakeindicator light when the key is in the "ON" or"START" position. Before driving away, be surethat the parking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.
o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.
o To release the parking brake, pull up andpress the thumb button. Then, while holdingthe button in, lower the brake lever.
B530A01O
!WARNING:
The tail gate should always be keptpletely closed while the vehicle is in mIf it is left open or ajar, poisonous exgases may enter the car resulting in seillness or death to the occupants. Seetional warnings concerning exhaust on page 2-2.
B
o The tail gate can be locked or unlockea key.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68
o To close the tail gate window, lower the tailgate window, and it will close by itself.T b th t il t i d i l
o The tail gate is opened by pulling the outsidehandle up, raising the tail gate manually.T l l th t il t th d
B540C01HP-GAT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGH
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 81/253
To be sure the tail gate window is securelyfastened, always try to pull it up again.
NOTE:The tail gate window lock is operated is in
connection with the tail gate lock. To openthe tail gate window make sure the tail gateis unlocked with a key or the central doorlocking switch.
o To close, lower the tail gate, then press downon it until it is closed. To be sure the tail gateis fully closed, always try to pull it up againwithout using the outside handle.
B540B02O-AAT
Tail gate Window
B540B01O
o When you push the tail gate window releasebutton to open the tail gate window, it willspring up slightly.Raise the tail gate window. The window willraise completly by itself after it has been
raised halfway.
Luggage compartment light has a 3-pswitch. The three positions are:
o In the "MIDDLE" position, the luggagpartment light comes on when the tail opened, then goes out when it is clo
o In the "ON" position, the light stays otimes.
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays otimes.
B5
FEATURES OF YOUR
B540D02O-AAT
LUGGAGE NETB640A01S-AAT
CARGO SECURITY SCREEN
(Ifi t ll d) !
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 82/253
When loading the objects in the luggagepartment, use the four rings located
luggage compartment to attach the luggaas shown illustration. This will help preveobjects from sliding.
(If installed)
B640A01O
To use the security screen, pull it out of the
retractor and hook it to the anchors as illus-trated.
B650A01S-AAT
Stowage Precautions
1. Do not place objects on the cargo security
screen. Such objects may be thrown aboutinside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicleoccupants during an accident or when brak-ing.
2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnec-essary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggagecompartment. It is designed for luggageonly.
4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle andlocate the weight as far forward as possible.
!
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
70 ROOF RACK
B630A02B-AAT
(If installed)
CAUTION!! CAUTION:
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 83/253
If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails andfixing components to adapt the roof rack on yourvehicle may be obtained from an authorizedHyundai dealer.
B630A01O
CAUTION:o In case the sunroof is equipped, d
position roof rack loads that couldfere with opening of the sunroof.
o The following specifications are r
mended when loading cargo or lug
75 lbs (34 kg) EveDistributed
o Loading cargo or luggage above (34 kg) on the roof rack may damagvehicle.When you carry large objects, nevthem hang over the rear or the sidyour vehicle.
o To prevent damage or loss of car
you are driving, check frequently tosure the luggage carrier and cargstill securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a mospeed.
o To use the roof rails as a roof racmust fit the roof rails with two orcrossrails or equivalent before cacargo or luggage on the roof.
o Loading cargo or luggage over scation on the roof rack may dastability of your vehicle.
ROOF RACK
!! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when carryingfragile or bulky objects in the luggage com-partment.
! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. Theluggage net ALWAYS keep your face andbody out of its recoil path. DO NOT usewhen the strap has visible signs of wear ordamage.
FEATURES OF YOUR
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEAAUTO FUEL CUT SWITCHHIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT
B550A01A-AAT
(If installed)B560B01O-AAT B560A02S-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 84/253
In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.
B550A01O
!
The auto fuel cut switch is located on the driver'sside of the engine compartment.In the event of a collision or sudden impact, theauto fuel cut device cuts off the fuel supply. If this
device is activated, it must be reset by pressingin on the top of the switch before the engine canbe restarted.
WARNING:Before resetting the auto fuel cut switch,the fuel line should be checked for fuelleaks.
B560B01O
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from insvehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid olocated on the front floor area on the left the car.
NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open becauhas formed around it, tap lightly or puthe lid to break the ice and release the lnot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray athe lid with an approved de-icer flunot use radiator anti-freeze) or movvehicle to a warm place and allow themelt.
B5
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72 HOOD RELEASE
!B570A01L-GAT
WARNING:
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 85/253
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the
WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high
ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.
Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.
o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the check engine"MIL" indicator illuminating.
o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.
B5
B
!WARNING:
o The fuel cap must be tightened at least
3 clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.
o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.
B560A02O-1
FEATURES OF YOUR
SUN VISORFLOOR MAT ANCHOR
2. Push the secondary latch lever up and lift thehood.
3. Raise the hood by hand.
B580A01L-AATB571A03Y-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 86/253
! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the
hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldopen while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.
o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or be
damaged.
y
When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors the driver and front passenger either frosideward shade. To reduce glare or to shdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor
A vanity mirrors are provided on the backsun visor for the driver and front passe
NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System label containing useful information cfound on the back of each sun visor
B
Vanity mirror
!
When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.
WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed
on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, It may cause anaccident.
o Don't put an additional floor mat on thetop of the fixed mat, otherwise the addi-tional mat may slide forward and inter-fere with the movement of the pedals.
HXGS263
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
74 FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING
LIGHT
STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER
B620A01S-AATB600A02Y-AAT
!WARNING:
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 87/253
!
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever upward and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.
WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.
A red light comes on when the front dopened. The purpose of this light is to when you get in or out and also to warn pvehicles.
B620A01
B580B01O-AAT
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If installed)
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automati-cally turn on the mirror light when the multi-function switch is turned to the first/secondposition.
B600A01O
WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.
FEATURES OF YOUR
CRUISE CONTROLREAR SEAT ARM RESTHORN
B611A01Y-AATB610A01L-GAT B660A01S-AAT
(If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 88/253
This arm rest is located in the center of the rearseat back.
B611A01O-A
Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.
B610A01O
The cruise control system provides autspeed control for your comfort when drivfreeways, tollroads, or other nonconghighways. This system is designed to fuabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)
B
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76
B660B03O-AAT
To Set the Cruise SpeedB660C02O-AAT
To cancel the cruise speed5. To increase speed, temporarily depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you remove
f f h l d l h
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 89/253
1. Push the cruise control ON´OFF button.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate. This turns thesystem on.
2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Push the "SET" (COAST) button after youhave set the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.
B660B01O
To disengage the cruise control systemthe "CANCEL" button.Additionally, the following actions will disethe system:
o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual trano Shift the selector lever to "N" positio
(Automatic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower th
memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/ho Decrease the vehicle speed to less t
mph (40 km/h).o Release the "MAIN" button.
B
your foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.
NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases more than 12mph (20 km/h) below the set speed ordecreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), thecruise control system will automaticallycancel the set speed.
FEATURES OF YOUR
!WARNING:
B660F02O-AAT
To Reset at a Slower SpeedB660D01O-AAT
To Resume the Preset Speed
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 90/253
o Keep the main switch off when notthe cruise control.
o Use the cruise control system onlytraveling on open highways in
weather.o Do not use the cruise control w
may not be safe to keep the caconstant speed, for instance, drivheavy or varying traffic, or on sli(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or wiroads or over 6% up-hill or dowroads.
o Pay particular attention to the dconditions whenever using the control system.
o During cruise-control driving w
manual transaxle vehicle, do notinto neutral without depressinclutch pedal, or the engine woverrevved. If this happens, depreclutch pedal or release the main s
o During normal cruise control operwhen the "SET" button is activatreactivated after applying the bthe cruise control will energizeapproximately 3 seconds. This denormal.
1. Push the "SET (COAST)" button and hold it.While the control button is pushed, the ve-hicle speed will gradually decrease.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control button.
B660B01O
The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push the"RESUME (ACCEL)" button, providing the ve-
hicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
B660E01Y-AAT
To Reset at a Faster Speed
1. Push the "RESUME (ACCEL)" button andhold it.
2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the"RESUME (ACCEL)" switch. While the con-trol switch is held, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.
B660D01O
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
B710A01O-GAT
(If installed)B710B02O-AAT
Center Ventilator
The center ventilators are located in the 1 2 3 4 12
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 91/253
HSM417
1. Side Ventilator2. Side Defroster Nozzle3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator
of the dashboard. To change the directionair flow, move the knob in the center of thup-and-down and side-to-side. The venopened when the vent knob is moved to "
position. The vents are closed when thknob is moved to " ". Keep these ventof any obstructions.
B710C02O-AAT
Side Ventilator
The side ventilators are located on each the front door. To change the direction offlow, move the knob in the center of the ve
and-down and side-to-side. The venopened when the vent knob is moved toposition. The vents are closed when thknob is moved to " ". Keep these ventof any obstructions.
FEATURES OF YOUR
HEATING AND VENTILATION
B670C02O-AAT
Air Intake Control SwitchB670B01O-AAT
Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)B670A03O-AAT
(If installed)
1 2
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 92/253
This is used to select fresh outside recirculating inside air.
FreshRecirculation
With the " " mode selected, air entevehicle from outside and is heated or according to the other functions selectWith the " " mode selected, air fromthe passenger compartment is drawn ththe heating system and heated or coolcording to the other functions selected.
This is used to select the blower fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-
trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the "1" and "4" position.
B670B01O-1 B6
There are three controls and two switches forthe heating and cooling system. They are:
1. Air intake control switch2. Air conditioning switch3. Air flow control4. Fan speed control5. Temperature control
B690A01O-1
1 2
3 4 5
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80
B670D03O-AAT
Air Flow ControlNOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the wind
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 93/253
This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.
B670D01O-1
B
will give rise to fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " "mode selected may result in the air withinthe passenger compartment becomingexcessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control switch will changeto " " mode in floor, floor-defrost anddefrost position. This is normal opera-tion. But, the air intake control switchwill change to " " mode when theignition switch is turned "ON" with theMAX A/C mode selected.
Face-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause aidischarged through the face level vents
FEATURES OF YOUR
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 94/253
Bi-Level
Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to have
cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.
B670D03O
Floor-Defrost Level
Air is discharged through the windshiefroster nozzle, the floor vents, side de
nozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, thwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mobe activated.
Floor-Level
Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle
and side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.
HSM118
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82
mode except the defrost mode and thefloor-defrost mode. Although the A/Cswitch indicator is turned off, this is normaloperation.
NOTE:o The air intake control switch will c
to " " mode when the ignition sis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 95/253
Defrost-Level
Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to improve windshield defrosting.
NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.If the air flow control is set to the defrost orthe floor-defrost mode, the A/C will be onautomatically and the A/C will not off until
the air flow control is set to the another
HSM120
MAX A/C-Level
Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.
MAXA/C
HSM428
* The A/C or the air intake control returns to its former setting.
A/C
ON
ON or OFF *
OF F
ON or OFF *
ON
ON
Air Intak
Control Sw
or
OF F
p is turned ON with the MAX A/C selected.
o When you change to another modeMAX A/C, the A/C and the air control switch are set to the follchart.
FEATURES OF YOUR
HEATING CONTROLS
B690A01O-AATB670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 96/253
For normal heating operation, set the acontrol to the floor ( ) position. (The "mode will be activated.)
For faster heating, the air intake control should be set in the recirculate ( ) po
If the windows fog up, set the air flow conthe defrost ( ) position (The A/C will tautomatically and "Fresh" mode will bvated.)
For maximum heat, move the temperaturtrol to "Warm".
B69
This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.
B670E01O
Cool WarmB670D07O
OFF Off-Level
Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.
NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
84 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMVENTILATIONBI-LEVEL HEATING
B710A01O-AATB700A01O-AAT B740A01S-AAT
(If installed)
Air Conditioning Switch
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 97/253
To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.
o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to the face ( )position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".
Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To use
this feature:
o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".
B700A01O-1 B710A01O-1
The air conditioning is turned on or
pushing the A/C button on the heating/aditioning control panel.
B7
FEATURES OF YOUR
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)
B740C02O-AAT
De-Humidified HeatingB740B03O-AAT
Air Conditioning Operation
Cooling
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 98/253
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on the
air intake control switch.
For dehumidified heating:
o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) po
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. Tconditioning indicator light should comthe same time.
o Set the air intake control switch to thair ( ) position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired o For more rapid action, set the fan at
the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to prov
desired amount of warmth.
B74
To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:
o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-
ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.
o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.
B740B01O-1
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86
B730A01L-AAT
Operation Tips
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 99/253
entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake controlswitch to the position.Be sure to return the control switch to
the position when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. Thiswill help keep the driver alert and comfort-able.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.
o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control switch to the fresh air( ) position, fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning system,and adjust temperature control to desiredtemperature.
FEATURES OF YOUR
B720A02E-AAT
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
Manual A/C Full automatic A/C Manual A/C Full automatic A/C
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 100/253
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:
To remove interior fog on the windshield;
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (TheA/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.
A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode wactivated.)
o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed coto the low position.
B720A02O-1 B720
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT
(If installed)
Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlled
B970B01O-AAT
Heating and Cooling Controls1 2 3 4 5
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 101/253
g g yby simply setting the desired temperature.
1. Temperature Control Button2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch3. Display Window
4. Air Flow Control Switch5. Blower Fan Speed Control Switch
6. OFF Switch7. Air Conditioning Switch8. Air Intake Control Switch
9. Defroster Switch10. Ambient Temperature Switch
B6 7 8 9 10
FEATURES OF YOUR
B970C01O-GAT
Automatic OperationNOTE:If the battery has been discharged oconnected, the temperature mode wilto Fahrenheit degree.This is a normal condition and yo
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 102/253
This is a normal condition and yoadjust the temperature mode from Faheit to Centigrade as follows;Press the TEMP down ( ) button 3 se
or more with the AMB button held The display shows that the unit of temture is adjusted to Fahrenheit or Centi(°F →→→→→ °C or °C →→→→→ °F).
The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls the heatingand cooling by doing as follows:
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill come on confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and, the air conditioning will operate ifambient temperature is higher than 32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if the ambi-ent temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).
NOTE:Never place things on the sensor whlocated in the car on the instrument to ensure better control of the heatin
cooling system.
B970C01O
Photo sensor
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum "HI" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperature
to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum "LO" by pushing on the button. Eachpush of the button will cause the temperatureto decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).
B970C03O
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90
B980B01Y-AAT
Fan Speed ControlB670C02S-AAT
Air Intake Control SwitchB995A01O-GAT
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 103/253
The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns offthe fan.
This is used to select fresh outside recirculation inside air.To change the air intake control mode,
mode, Recirculation mode) push the cbutton.
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator lightbutton goes off when the air intake contrfresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indlight on the button is illuminated when tintake control is in recirculation mode.
B6B980B01O
Pressing the "AMB" button displays the ambienttemperature on display window.
B980A01Y-AAT
MANUAL OPERATION
The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well as by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. At this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.
B995A01O
FEATURES OF YOUR
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from
B980D01Y-AAT
Heating and Cooling System OffB980E01O-AAT
Air Flow Control
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 104/253
With the Recirculation mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.
NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to"FRESH" mode (regardless of the switchposition). This is normal operation. Theair intake control operates in "AUTO"mode when turning the ignition to the"ON" position if the "AUTO" mode wasused before shutting off the engine.
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air cdirected to the floor, dashboard outlewindshield. Four symbols are used to rep
Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrostion.
Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.
B980D01O
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 105/253
Floor-LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Level", the inlight will come on and the air will be dischthrough the floor vents, windshield de
nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side vtor.
B670D03O
Bi-LevelWhen selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator lightwill come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the face vents and the floor vents. This
makes it possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from the flooroutlets at the same time.
Face-LevelWhen selecting the "Face-Level", the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.
B670D02O
FEATURES OF YOUR
B980F02O-AAT
Defrost SwitchB740D01Y-AAT
Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when yoget in, open the windows for a few mto expel the hot air
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 106/253
B980F01O
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the "Fresh"mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-
froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning willoperate if ambient temperature is higher than32°F(0°C) and automatically turns off if theambient temperature drops below 32°F(0°C).
to expel the hot air.o When you are using the air condi
system, keep all windows closed to keair out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffto a lower gear. This increases engine swhich in turn increases the speed of conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air conditionto avoid the possibility of the engineheating.
o During winter months or in periods whair conditioning is not used regularly, rair conditioning once every month forminutes. This will help circulate the
cants and keep your system in peakating condition.
Floor-Defrost LevelWhen selecting the "Floor-Defrost Level", theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defroster
nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.
HSM119
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
How Car Audio WorksIonosphere
AM reception
Mountains Unobstr
FM radio station
Ionosphere
FM reception
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 107/253
AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna on
your car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frecies and do not bend to follow the esurface. Because of this, FM broadcasterally begin to fade at short distances frostation. Also, FM signals are easily affec
buildings, mountains, or other obstruThese can result in certain listening conwhich might lead you to believe a problemwith your radio. The following conditionormal and do not indicate radio trouble
B750A02L
Buildings
B
B750A01L
Obstructed areaIron bridges
FEATURES OF YOUR
B750B03Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
When a cellular phone is used inside the vnoise may be produced from the audio ment This does not mean that someth
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 108/253
!
o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, select
another station with a stronger signal.o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.
ment. This does not mean that somethwrong with the audio equipment. In such ause the cellular phone at a place as possible from the audio equipment.
WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when yodriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cephone.
B750A04L B750A05L
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96 AUDIO SYSTEM
H260A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If installed)
3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob
4. SCAN Button
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 109/253
1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob
H2. FADER Control Knob
5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
6. BAND Selector
7. PRESET Button
FEATURES OF YOUR
H260B04O-AAT
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press theknob to switch the power on. The LCD shows
3. BASS Control Knob
Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired bass tone.
TREB (Treble Control) Knob
SEEK Operation
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the TUNE select button for 0.5 more. Releasing it will automatically tune
il bl i i h b d
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 110/253
pthe radio frequency in the radio mode or the CDtrack indicator in the CD mode. To switch thepower off, press the knob again.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.
BALANCE Control
Pull and turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize right speaker sound (left speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counterclockwise, left speakersound will be emphasized (right speaker soundwill be attenuated).
2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob
Turn the control knob counterclockwise toemphasize front speaker sound (rear speakersound will be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned clockwise, rear speaker soundwill be emphasized (front speaker sound will be
attenuated).
TREB (Treble Control) Knob
Pull the bass control knob further out.
Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.
4. SCAN Button
When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.
5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. Press either buttonand hold down to continuously scroll.Release button once the desired station isreached.
next available station with a beep soundWhen the ( ) side is pressed longer thsecond, releasing will automatically tune
next higher frequency and when the ( ) pressed longer than 0.5 second, releasiautomatically tune to the next lower freq
6. BAND Selector
Pressing the button changes the AMand FM2 bands. The mode selected played on LCD.
7. PRESET STATION SELECT But
Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 retively can be preset in the electronic mcircuit on this unit.
FM/AM
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons you may
CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The audio system mecha-
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 111/253
one of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:
o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored into
the memory.You should then release the button, andproceed to program the next desired station.A total of 18 stations can be programmed byselecting one AM and two FM stations perbutton.
o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.
nism may be damaged if you spill them.o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the audio system mechanism could be
damaged.
FEATURES OF YOUR
H260B01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If installed)
4. SCAN Button
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 112/253
1. Playing CD
H
2. FF/REW Button
3. TRACK UP/DOWN
5. REPEAT Button
6. EJECT Button
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
100
B260D04O-AAT
1. Playing CD
o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during
radio operation.Wh di i i h CD d k if
4. SCAN Button
o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.
NOTE:o If the CD does not operate proper
the ER2 fault code is displayed, usof two methods to reset the CDfunction.- Remove the audio fuse for 5 mi
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 113/253
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you pressthe CD button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
2. FF/REW ( / )
If you want to fast forward or reverse throughthe compact disc track, push and hold the FF( ) or REW ( ) button.When you release the button, the compact discplayer will resume playing.
3. TRACK UP/DOWNo The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the tracknumber.
o Press once to skip forward to the beg-inning of the next track. Press once toskip back to the beginning of the track.
y
5. REPEAT Button
o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when thetrack ends, it will automatically be replayed.This process will be continued until you pushthe button again.
6. EJECT Button
When the EJECT button is pressed with a
CD loaded, the CD will eject.
Remove the audio fuse for 5 miThen, reinstall the audio fuse.
- Diconnect the negative terminal
battery and wait 5 minutes. Thconnect the negative battery ter
o To assure proper operation of thekeep the vehicle interior tempewithin a normal range by usinvehicle's air conditioning or hesystem.
o When replacing the fuse, replace a fuse having the correct capacity
o The preset station frequencies aerased when the car battery is dnected. Therefore, all data will have
set again if this should occur.o Do not add any oil to the rotating
Keep magnets, screwdrivers and metallic objects away from themechanism and head.
FEATURES OF YOUR
o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.
! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 114/253
y po When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.o Do not expose this equipment (includ-
ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.
unit may occur.o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit may
occur.o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
102
B890A02O-AAT
AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system CD mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
SOLUTIONINDICATION CAUSE
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 115/253
SOLUTION
After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.
If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
INDICATION
Er2
Er3
Er6
CAUSE
CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR
(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)
FOCUS ERROR
DATA READ ERROR
DISC ERROR
FEATURES OF YOUR
D285A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 116/253
6. AUDIO Knob(Bass/Treble)
1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob
4. SEEK/SCAN Butt
7. AUTO EQUALIZER
5. PRESET STATIOSelect Button
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104
D285B02O-AAT
1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob
Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOLUME Control
SCAN
Press and hold one of the arrows for more thantwo seconds. The radio will produce one beep.The radio will produce one beep. The radio willscan to each stations, play for a few seconds,th t th t t ti P f th
5. Press and hold one of the six numpushbuttons. The radio will producbeep. Whenever you press that numpushbutton, the station you set will and the bass and treble equalization thselected will also be automatically sef h hb
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 117/253
Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume.Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
2. BAND Select Button
Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. The display will show your selection.
3. RADIO STATION Control Knob
Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4. SEEK/SCAN Button
SEEKPress the up or down arrow to seek to the nextor previous station and stay there. The soundwill mute while seeking.
then go on to the next station. Press one of thearrows or one of the pushbuttons again to stopscanning. SCAN will be displayed whenever thetuner is in the scan mode. In FM mode, thisfunction will scan through the current band suchas FM1 or FM2. The radio will scan stations witha strong signal only. The sound will mute whilescanning.
5. PRESET STATION Select Button
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND select button to select AM, FM1
of FM2.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to choose the bass and
treble equalization that best suits the type ofstation you are listening to.
for that pushbutton.6. Repeat the above steps for each push
6. AUDIO Knob
Setting the Tone (BASS/Treble)
Push and release the AUDIO knob until or TREB appears on the display. Turn thclockwise or counterclockwise to incredecrease. The display will show the btreble level. If a station is weak or noisy, yowant to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass and treble to the middle po
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radproduce one beep and adjust the displato the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controlsmiddle position, push and hold the AUDIOwhen no tone or speaker control is dispThe radio will produce one beep and dCENTERED.
FEATURES OF YOUR
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance between the right and leftspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil BAL appears on the display. Turn the knobclockwise to move the sound to the right speak-ers and counterclockwise to move the sound to
7. AUTO EQUALIZER
This feature allows you to choose bass andtreble equalization settings designed for coun-try jazz, news, pop, rock and classical stations.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button
CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close t
audio system. The audio system mnism may be damaged if you spill
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 118/253
ers and counterclockwise to move the sound tothe left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE appears on the display. Turn theknob clockwise to move the sound to the frontspeakers and counterclockwise to move thesound to the rear speakers.
The middle position balances the sound be-tween the speakers. To adjust the balance andfade to the middle position, push the AUDIOknob then push it again and hold it until you hear
one beep. The balance and fade will be adjustedto the middle position and the display will showthe speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is display ALLwith the level display in the middle position.
Each time you press the AUTO TONE button,this feature will change to one of the presetequalization settings previously listed.
To return the bass and treble to the custommode, push and release the AUDIO knob untilcustom is displayed.
8. Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage form loud noise is almostundetectable until it is too late. Your hearing canadapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound thatseems normal can be loud and harmful to your
hearing. Take precautions by adjusting thevolume control on your radio to a safe soundlevel before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage do thefollowing:
1. Adjust the volume knob to the lowest setting.2. Increase volume slowly until you hear com-
fortably and clearly.
o Do not impact on the audio systethe audio system mechanism cou
damaged.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106
D285C01O-AAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)
2. REVERSE Button
3. FORWARD Button
5. DOLBY Button 4.SIDE Button
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 119/253
6. BAND Select Button
1. SEEK Button
7. TAPE/CD Select Button
8. TAPE EJECT Button
FEATURES OF YOUR
D285D02O-AAT
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is bui lt to work best with tapesthat are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side.Tapes longer than that are so thin they may notwork well in this player. The longer side with the
SEEK
Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If thispushbutton is pressed and the current selectionhad been playing for more than 13 seconds it
3. FORWARD Button
Press this pushbutton to advance quicanother part of the tape. Press this pushagain to return to playing speed. The radplay the last selected station while theadvances The station frequency and FW
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 120/253
p y gtape visible should face to the right. If the ignitionis on, but the radio is off, the tape can be inserted
and will begin playing. A tape symbol is shownon the display whenever a tape is inserted. If youhear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape maynot be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove thetape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIOand SEEK controls just as you do for the radio.The display will show TAPE and an arrowshowing which side of the tape is playing. Youcan insert a tape when the ignition is off.If an error appears on the display, see "Cas-
sette Tape Message" later in this section.
1. SEEK Button
SEEK
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selectionon the tape if you press pushbutton more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the tape. SEEK and a positive numberwill appear on the display. Your tape must haveat least three seconds of silence between eachselection for next to work. The sound still mutewhile seeking.
had been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the previous selectionor the beginning of the current selection, de-pending upon the position on the tape. SEEK anda negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previousmode. If this pushbutton is pressed additionaltimes or held, the radio will go to the displayednumber of previous selections up to 9. SEEKand a negative number will appear on the dis-play. Your tape must have at least three sec-onds of silence between each selection forprevious to work. The sound will mute whileseeking.
2. REVERSE Button
Press this pushbutton to reverse the tape rap-idly. Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will play the last selected station whilethe tape reverses. The station frequency andREV will appear on the display. You may selectstations during reverse operation by usingTUNE, SEEK or PRESET SCAN.
advances. The station frequency and FWappear on the display. You may select stduring forward operation by using TUNE,or PRESET SCAN.
4. SIDE Button
Press this pushbutton to play the other sthe tape.
5. (Dolby)
Press this pushbutton to reduce backgnoise. DOLBY B ON will appear on the dPress it again to turn Dolby B off. DOLBY will appear on the display. Dolby Noise Rtion is manufactured under a license formLaboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolbthe double-D symbol are trademarks oflaboratories Licensing Corporation.
6. BAND Select Button
Press this button to listen to the radio wtape is playing. The tape will stop but remthe player.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108
7. TAPE/CD Select Button
Press this button to play a tape when listeningto the radio. Press TAPE/CD to switch betweenthe tape and compact disc if both are loaded.The inactive tape or CD will remain safe insidethe radio for future listening
o The tape is broken. Try a new tape.o The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a newtape.
CLEAN
Your tape player should be cleaned reafter every 59 hours of use. Your radidisplay CLEAN to indicate that you haveyour tape player needs to be cleaned. It wplay tapes, but you should clean it as sopossible to prevent damage to your tapeplayer If you notice a reduction in sound q
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 121/253
the radio for future listening.
8. Cassette Tape EJECT ButtonPress this button, located to the right of thecassette tape slot to eject a tape. The tape isejected with the radio off. Cassette tape may beloaded with the radio off.
9. Cassette Tape Messages
CHECK TAPE
If this message appears on the radio display, thetape won't play because of one of the following
errors.o The tape is tight and the player can't turn thetape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tapewith the open end down and try to turn theright hub counterclockwise with a pencil.Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs donot turn easily, your tape may be damagedand should not be used in the player. Try anew tape to make sure your player is work-ing properly.
If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean it as soonas possible to prevent damage to the tapes andplayer. See "Care of Your Cassette Tape Player"in the Index.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can'tbe corrected, contact your dealer.
10. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly cancause reduced sound quality, reined cassettesor a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their case away from con-taminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. Ifthey aren't they may not operate properly ormay cause failure of the tape player.
player. If you notice a reduction in sound qtry a known good cassette to see of it is thor the tape player or fault. If this other cahas no improvement in sound quality, cletape player.
The recommended cleaning method focassette tape player is the use of a scraction, non-abrasive cleaning cassettpads which scrub the tape head as the hthe cleaner cassette turn. The recommcleaning cassette is available throughdealer.
When cleaning the cassette tape player wrecommended non-abrasive cleaning cait is possible that the cassette may ejecause the cut tape detection feature oradio may recognize it as a broken tapprevent the cleaning cassette from ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ON or ACC.2. Turn the radio off.
FEATURES OF YOUR
3. Press and hold the TAPE/CD select buttonfor five seconds. READY will appear on thedisplay and a cassette symbol will flash forfive second.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cas-sette.
5 Eject the cleaning cassette after the
! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 122/253
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after themanufacturer's recommended cleaningtime.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected,the broken tape detection feature is activeagain.You may also choose a non-scrubbing action,wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with afabrica belt to clean the tape head. This type ofcleaning cassette will not eject on its own. Anon-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean asthoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. Theuse of a non-scrubbing action, dry-tape clean-
ing cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold theEJECT button for five seconds to reset theCLEAN indicator. The radio will displayCLEANED to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the soundquality may degrade over time. Always makesure the cassette tape is in good conditionbefore you have your tape player serviced.
o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110
D285E01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-285) (If installed)
2. REVERSE Button
3. FORWARD Button
4. RANDOM Button
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 123/253
7. CD EJECT Button
5. BAND Select Button
1. SEEK/SCAN But
6. TAPE/CD Select Button
FEATURES OF YOUR
D285F02O-AAT
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot. Label side up.The player will pull it in and the disc should beginplaying. The display will show the CD symbol.You can inset a compact disc with the ignition off.
SCAN
Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN will
4. RANDOM Button
Press this pushbutton to hear the trarandom, rather than sequential, order. RDappear on the display. RDM T and thenumber will appear on the display whentrack starts to play. Press it again to tu
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 124/253
NOTE:
This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.
1. SEEK/SCAN Button
SEEK
Press this Pushbutton to go to the next TRACKand the track number will appear on the display.If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forwardthrough the disc. The sound will mute whileseeking.
SEEK
Press this Pushbutton to go to the previoustrack if the current track has been playing forless than eight seconds. If this pushbutton ispressed and the current track has been playingfor more than eight seconds, it will go to thebeginning of the current track. TRACK and thetrack number will appear on the display. If youhold this pushbutton or press it more than once,the player will continue moving back through thedisc. The sound will mute while seeking.
appear on the display. Press either SEEK SCANarrow again to stop scanning.
2. REVERSE Button
Press and hold this pushbutton to reversequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to re-verse at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toreverse at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.
3. FORWARD Button
Press and hold this pushbutton to advancequickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to ad-vance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two seconds toadvance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release it to play the passage. The display willshow ET and the elapsed time.
random play. RDM OFF will appear odisplay.
5. BAND Select Button
Press this button to listen to the radio wdisc is playing. The disc will stop but remthe player.
6. TAPE/CD Select Button
Press this button to play a CD when listethe radio. Press TAPE CD to switch betwetape and compact disc if both are loadeinactive tape or CD will remain safely insradio for future listening.
7. CD EJECT Button
Press this button, located to the left of the Cto eject a CD. Eject may be activated withthe ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadethe radio and ignition off.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112
8. Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle disc careful. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If the surface of a discis soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping
To disable the feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the radio off.2. Press and hold the TAPE CD Button. The
radio will display READY and flash the cas-sette icon.
3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor q
discs into the CD player as damageunit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins in
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 125/253
from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writingwhen handling discs. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of the hole and theouter edge.
9. Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal to the CDmechanism.
10. CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapterkit with your cassette tape player after disablingthe tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tapeplayer.
power up the radio and begin playing
This override routine will remain active untilEJECT button is pressed.
NOTE:Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle--like a tape player, CB radio,mobile telephone or two-way radio--be sureyou can add what you want. If you can, it'svery important to do it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle's engine, Delphi
Electronics radio or other systems, andeven damage them. Your vehicle's systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added improp-erly. So, before adding sound equipment,check with your dealer and be sure to checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units.
o o ot se t a yt g e co splayer slot as damage to the uni
occur.o Do not place beverages close taudio system. The playback mechmay be damaged if you spill them
o Do not impact on the audio systethe playback mechanism could beaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other tions may skip your compact discDo not use the audio system oroads as the discs could be scraand damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc withand while the disc is being pullethe unit by the self loading mechaThese can cause poor disc scratchoccur or trouble in the compacplayer.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable oRewritable as the player could noperated in recording way of thmaker. When using the compacplayer, genuine CDs are recomme
FEATURES OF YOUR
D295A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 126/253
2. BAND Select Button
4. SEEK/SCAN Butto
7. AUTO EQUALIZER
1. POWER ON•OFF,VOLUME Control Knob
3. RADIO STATIONControl Knob
6. AUDIO Knob(BASS/MID/TREB)
5. PRESET STATION Select Button
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114
D295B02O-AAT
1. POWER ON•OFF Control Knob
Press this knob to turn the system on and off.
VOLUME Control
To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
SCAN
Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN appears on the displayand you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen tostations for a few seconds. The radio will go toa station, stop for a few seconds, then go to thenext station Press either SEEK/SCAN arrow
PRESET SCAN
Press and hold either SEEK/SCAN arrmore than four seconds, PRESET SCAappear on the display. You will hear a dbeep. Use PERSET SCAN to listen to eyour preset stations for a few secondsradio will go to a preset station stored o
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 127/253
,Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
2. BAND Select Button
Press this button to switch between AM, FM1and FM2. Then Display shows your selection.
3. RADIO STATION Control Knob
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
4. SEEK/SCAN Button
SEEK
Press the up or down arrow to go to the nexthigher or lower station and stay there. Thesound will mute while seeking.
next station. Press either SEEK/SCAN arrowagain to stop scanning. If you press SEEK/
SCAN for more than four seconds, the radio willchange to preset scan mode. Then sound willmute while scanning.
5. PRESET STATION Select Button
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return toyour favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2) byperforming the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.2. Press AM · FM to select the band.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization
that best suited type of station selected.5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever youpress that numbered button, the station youset will return and the equalization that youselected will also be automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the above steps for each pushbutton.
radio will go to a preset station stored opushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then
to the next preset stations. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning pr
6. AUDIO Knob
BASS
Press the AUDIO knob until BASS appethe display. Turn the knob to increase crease bass. When you use this contrradio's tone setting will switch to custom To set the bass to the middle position,
BASS and press and hold the AUDIO knoradio will produce one beep and set the dlevel to zero. To set all tone and spcontrols to the middle position, press anthe AUDIO knob when no tone or spcontrol is active. The radio will producbeep and CENTERED will appear on thplay.
FEATURES OF YOUR
MID
Press the AUDIO knob until MID appears on thedisplay. Turn the knob to increase or decreasemid. When you use this control, the radio's tonesetting will switch to custom mode.
To set the mid to the middle position select MID
7. AUTO EQUALIZER Button
This feature allows you to choose preset bass,mid and treble equalization settings designedfor country, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classicalstations. The last setting will appear on thedisplay when you first press AUTO EQ. Eachtime you press AUTO EQ another setting will
To set the balance and fade to the position, select balance or fade and prehold the AUDIO knob.The radio will beep once and will set the dlevel to the middle position, To set all tonspeaker controls to the middle position,and hold the AUDIO knob when tone or scontrols are not active The radio will pr
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 128/253
To set the mid to the middle position, select MIDand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.Then radio will produce one beep and CEN-TERED will appear on the display.
TREB
Press the AUDIO knob until TREB appears onthe display. Turn the knob to increase to de-crease treble. When you use this control, the
radio's tone setting will switch to custom mode.If a station is weak or noisy, you may want todecrease the treble.
To set treble to the middle position, select TREBand press and hold the AUDIO knob. The radiowill produce one beep and set the display levelto zero. To set all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press and hold the AUDIOknob when no tone or speaker control is active.The radio will produce one beep and CEN-
TERED will appear on the display.
time you press AUTO EQ, another setting willappear on the display. Press AUTO EQ again
country disappear and CUSTOM will appear.Tone control will return to the BASS, MID andTREB. Also, if you alter BASS, MID, or TREBwhile in an auto EQ setting, the radio will returnto CUSTOM. CUSTOM will appear on the dis-play.
8. Adjusting the Speakers
BAL-FADE
The AUDIO knob adjusts balance and fade. To
adjust balance, press the AUDIO knob until BALappears on the display. Turn the knob to adjustthe sound to the left or right speakers. Themiddle position balances the sound between thespeakers. To adjust fade, press and hold theAUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display.Turn the knob to adjust the sound to the front orrear speakers. The middle position balancesthe sound between the speakers.
controls are not active. The radio will prone beep and CENTERED will appear
display.
! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close t
audio system. The audio system mnism may be damaged if you spill
o Do not impact on the audio systethe audio system mechanism coudamaged.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116
D295C01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (D-295) (If installed)
5. REPEAT Button
11. Song List Mode
6. RANDOM Button
1. LOAD Button
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 129/253
8. SEEK/SCAN Butt
7. AUTO EQUALIZER
3. REVERSE Button
4. FORWARD Button
2. CD EJECT Butto
9. Playing CD
FEATURES OF YOUR
D295D03O-AAT
1. LOAD Button
This compact disc playing will accommodate upto six discs.To insert one disc do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green.Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into theslot, label side up.The player will pull the disc in.Once the disc is loaded, the light will beginflashing again. Once the light stop flashingand turns green you can then load anotherdisc The disc player takes up to six discs
A small bar will appear under the CD numbis playing, it could be due to one of the folconditions:
o The road is too rough. The disc shouwhen the road is smoother.
o The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or down
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 130/253
2. Press and release the LOAD Button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.4. Load a disc. Insert a disc partway into the
slot, label side up. The player will pull the discin.
NOTE:This CD player is suitable only for 12 cmdiscs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.
When the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will bedisplayed. If you select an EQ setting for your
disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to playautomatically.
To inset multiple discs do the followings:
1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two
seconds.You will then hear two beeps and the light,located to the right of the slot, will begin toflash.
disc. The disc player takes up to six discs.Do not try to load more than six.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol willbe displayed. If more than one disc has beenloaded, number for each disc will be dis-played. If you select an EQ setting for yourdisc, it will be activated each time you play adisc.If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded willbegin to play automatically.
4. To load more than one disc but less than six,complete Steps 1, 2 and 3. When you havefinished loading discs, with the radio on or off,press LOAD to cancel the loading function.The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear onthe radio display. To play a specific CD, firstpress the CD select button to start playing a CD.Then press the numbered button that corre-
sponds to the CD you want to play.
down.o The air is very humid. If so, wait about a
and try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or i f an errobe corrected, please contact your deayour radio displays an error message, wdown and provide it to your dealer when ing the problem.
2. CD EJECT Button
This button will eject a disc or discs, if youmultiple discs loaded. To eject a disc orfrom the disc player perform one of the folsteps:
o Press and release the eject button tthe disc that is currently playing.
o To eject all of the discs, press this buttwo seconds, you will hear three beepthe light will flash to let you know whenis being ejected.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118
When the eject button is pressed, the receiverwill eject the disc and REMOVE CD will bedisplayed. You can now remove the disc. If thedisc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the discwill be automatically pulled back into the re-ceiver, If you try to push the disc back into thereceiver, before the 25 second time period iscomplete the receiver will sense an error and
4. FORWARD Button
Press and hold this button to advance quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.
5 REPEAT Button
o Press and release the RDM button tthe tracks on all of the discs that are loin random order. RDM will appear display. Press RDM to turn if off.
o To play the tracks on the disc yolistening to in random order, press anRDM for more than two seconds. Yhear three beeps and RDM will appear
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 131/253
complete, the receiver will sense an error andwill try to eject the disc several times before
stopping. You cannot repeatedly press the ejectbutton to eject the disc after you have tried topush the CD in manually. The receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press ofeject, which will cause the receiver to not ejectthe disc until the 25-second time period haselapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected,remove the disc. After removing the disc, pressthe VOLUME PWR knob off and then on again.This will clear the disc-sensing feature andenable discs to be loaded into the player again.
3. REVERSE Button
Press and hold this button reverse quicklywithin a track. Release it to play the passage.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Thedisplay will show elapsed time.
5. REPEAT Button
With repeat button, you can repeat one track oran entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
o To repeat the track you are listening to,press and release the RPT button. RPTtrack will appear on the display. Press RPTagain to turn it off.
o To repeat the disc you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.Press RPT again to turn it off.
6. RANDOM Button
With random, you can listen to the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential order, on all ofthe discs or on one disc.To use random, do the following:
hear three beeps and RDM will appeardisplay. Press RDM again to turn if o
7. AUTO EQUALIZER
Press AUTO EQ to select the desired equalization setting while playing a codisc. The equalization will be automaticawhenever you play a compact disc.
8. SEEK/SCAN BUTTON
SEEK
Press the down arrow while playing a CDto the start of the current track if more thseconds have played. Press the up arrowto the next track. If you press the buttonthan once, the player will continue movingward or forward through the disc.
FEATURES OF YOUR
SCAN
Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN appears onthe display and you hear a beep. Use SEEKSCAN to listen to each track for a few seconds.The sounds will mute while scanning. SCAN willappear on the display. Press either SEEK SCAN
10. Using Song List Mode
The integrated 6-disc CD changer has a featurecalled song list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.
To save tracks into SONG LIST perform thefollowing steps:
To play the song list, press LIST. One bebe heard and SLIST will appear on the dThe recorded tracks will begin to play order that they were saved.You may seek through the song list by usSEEK SCAN arrows. Seeking past thsaved track will return you to the first track.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 132/253
pp p yarrow again, to stop scanning.
DISC SCAN
Press and hold either SEEK SCAN arrow formore than four seconds until DISC SCAN ap-pears on the display and you hear a beep. UseDISC SCAN to listen to the first track, for tenseconds of each disc loaded. The sound willmute while scanning to the next track. DISCSCAN will appear on the display. Press eitherSEEK SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
9. Playing CD
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, duringradio operation or cassette tape playing.
o When discs are in the CD deck, if you pressthe play button the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.
g p
1. The disc player must be on with at least onedisc loaded. See "LOAD/EJECT" previouslyfor more information.
2. The disc changer must not be in song listmode. S-LIST should not appear in the dis-play. If S-LIST is present, press SONG LISTto turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theSEEK SCAN up arrow button to locate thetrack that you want to save. The track willbegin to play.
4. Press and hold LIST for two or more sec-onds to save the track into memory. WhenLIST is pressed a beep will be heard imme-diately. After two seconds of pressing LISTcontinuously, two beeps will sound, to con-firm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.
t ac
To delete tracks from SONG LIST perfofollowing steps:
1. The disc player must be turned on.2. Press SONG LIST to turn song list o
S-LIST will appear on the display.3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to sel
desired track to be deleted.4. Press and hold the SONG LIST but
two seconds. When pressing SONGone beep will be heard immediately. Afseconds of pressing the SONG LIST continuously, two beeps will be heaconfirm that the track had been dele
5. To delete entire lists, press and holdbutton for > 4 seconds when pressinone beep will be heard immediately. Afseconds of pressing the LIST buttotinuously, two beeps will be heard. Aseconds, a beep would be heard to cthat all the tracks had been deleted adisplay will show SLIST_EMPTY.
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120
! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit may
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 133/253
player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.
o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.
FEATURES OF YOUR
CARE OF CASSETTE TAPESCARE OF DISCS
B850A02F-AAT
Proper HandlingStorage
When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.
B860A01A-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 134/253
B850A02L
Keep Your Discs Clean
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do
not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.
Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean. See drawing.
Proper care of your cassette tapes will ethe tape life and increase your listening ment. Always protect your tapes and cacases from direct sunlight, severely codusty conditions. When not in use, cas
should always be stored in the original ptive cassette case. When the vehicle is vor cold, allow the interior temperature to bmore comfortable before listening to yousettes.
B850A01L
B
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122
o The playback head, capstan and piners will develop a coating of tape residcan result in deterioration of sound qsuch as a wavering sound. They shocleaned monthly using a commerciallyable head cleaning tape or special savailable from audio specialty shops. the supplier's directions carefully and
o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.
o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.
o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsettling in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If this
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 135/253
o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.
Head
Cotton applicator
B860A01O
B860A02L
oil any part of the tape player unit.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly on its reel before inserting in the pRotate a pencil in the drive sprockets tup any slack.
occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by
fast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem,do not continue to use the tape in yourvehicle.
FEATURES OF YOUR
ANTENNA
B870C01A-GAT
Manual Antenna (If installed)B880C02B-AAT
Glass Antenna (If installed)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 136/253
Your car uses a manual stainless steel antennato receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.Pull up the antenna using your fingers, as shownin the drawing.
When the radio power switch is turned onthe ignition key is in either the "ON" or position, your car will receive both AM abroadcast signals through the antenna
rear quarter glass.
CAUTION:Before entering an automatic car wash or aplace with a low height clearance such as aresidential or commercial garage, be surethat the antenna is fully retracted.
!
B870C01OB880C
NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tapeis loose, tighten it by turning one of thehubs with a pencil or your finger. If the labelis peeling off, do not put it in the drivemechanism.
Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, letit reach a moderate temperature beforeputting it in the player.
B860A03L
1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
124
CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear
quarter glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage to
!B885A01O-AAT
MICRO ANTENNA (If installed)
Your car uses the micro antenna to receive bothAM and FM broadcast signals.This antenna is folding and removable type.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 137/253
g y gthe antenna elements.
o Avoid adding metallic coating (someaftermarket window tinting has metalliccontents). These can disturb receivingAM and FM broadcast signals.
CAUTION:
1. Be sure to fold the micro antenna beforeentering a garage with a low height orinstalling a car cover.
2. Before entering an automatic car remove by turning the antenna coclockwise to prevent damage to thcro antenna. To install the antennathe antenna clockwise.
!
B885A01O
B8
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4Starting .......................................................................... 2-5
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 138/253
2Manual Transaxle ......................................................... 2-6Automatic Transaxle ............................................ 2-8, 2-11Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-15Brake Traction Control System (BTCS) ..................... 2-15Full Traction Control System (FTCS) ......................... 2-17Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-18Limited-Slip Differential................................................ 2-20Good Braking Practices.............................................. 2-21Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-22Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-23Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-26
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03O-AAT
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 139/253
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garageany longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the airintake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
!PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
DRIVING YOUR
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGIN
!! WARNING:o The 2WD Santa Fe is not designed for
off-road use. The 4WD Santa Fe is de-signed primarily for use on paved roads.However, occasional use in off-highwayconditions such as established unpaved
d d h ll i ff d
C020A01A-AAT
Before you start the engine, you should a
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure thno flat tires, puddles of oil, water orindications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be suparking brake is engaged.
3 Check that all windows and lights are
o Utility vehicle have higher ground clear-ance and a narrower track to make themcapable of performing in a wide varietyof off-road applications. Specific designcharacteristics give them a higher center
f iti th di A d
WARNING:
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 140/253
roads and non-challenging off-roadtrails is allowed. The 4WD Santa Fe is notdesigned for blazing new trails, chal-lenging off-road conditions, or unpavedhill climbing. Exceeding the conditionsthat were intended for the vehicle's pri-mary design may result in injury or death.
o Utility vehicle has a significantly highercollision rate than other type of vehicles.
3. Check that all windows, and lights are
4. Check that the interior and exterior mare clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and headbe sure they are in their proper posi
6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure t
other occupants have fastened thei8. Turn off all lights and accessories th
not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to
check that all appropriate warning lighoperating and that you have sufficien
10.Check the operation of warning lights bulbs when key is in the "ON" positio
of gravitiy than ordinary cars. An advan-
tage of the higher ground clearance is abetter view of the road allowing you toanticipate problem. They are not de-signed for cornering at the same speedsas conventional 2-wheel drive vehiclesany more than low-slung sports cars aredesigned to perform satisfactorily un-der off-road conditions. If at all possible,avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.o In a collision crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4 KEY POSITIONSTO START THE ENGINE
C040A01A-AAT NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" pofor more than 15 seconds.
o "ON"
When the key is in the "ON" position, the igis on and all accessories may be turnedthe engine is not running, the key should
LOCK
ACC
ON
C030A01E-AAT
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).
o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andi h "START" i i R l i
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 141/253
CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinder
while the car is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.
the engine is not running, the key should
left in the "ON" position. This will discharbattery and may also damage the ignitiotem.
o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, sometrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beated.
o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted
position.To protect against theft, the steering locks by removing the key.
NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert thand then turn the steering wheel ansimultaneously.
C040A01E-1
START
!
turn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more that 15seconds.
NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the
clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).
o The ignition key cannot be turned from
"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).
o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-5.
o "START"
The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.
DRIVING YOUR
STARTING
C070C01A-AAT
To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT C050B01A-AAT
Normal Conditions:
The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and pla
gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in nor the selector lever (automatic transa"P" ( k) iti
LOCK
ACC
ON
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 142/253
!1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition
key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-tion to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.
WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed to
move your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.
"P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the
position, make certain all warning lighgauges are functioning properly beforeing the engine.
WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully deprwhen starting a manual transaxle veYour manual transaxle equipped v
will not start unless the clutch pedal idepressed. On a manual transaxle equvehicle that can be started withoupressing the clutch, there is the potencause damage to the vehicle or injsomeone inside or outside the vehiclresult of the forward or backward ment of the vehicle that will occur clutch is not depressed when the vehstarted.
!C070C01E-1
C050A01E-1
START
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
6 OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE
NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the le
neutral for at least 3 seconds aftecar is completely stopped. Then the lever into the reverse position
o During cold weather, shifting mdifficult until the transaxle lubricawarmed up. This is normal and not ful to the transaxle.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.
C070A02A-AAT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 143/253
o If you've come to a complete stoit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Revput the shift lever in N(Neutral) poand release the clutch. Press the cpedal back down, and then shift inor R(Reverse) gear position.
o Do not use the shift lever as a haduring driving, as this can result imature wear of the transaxle shift
CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to gear, caution should be taken not tovertently press the gear lever sidewasuch a manner that second gear gaged. Such a drastic downshift may the engine speed to increase to thethat the tachometer will enter the redSuch over-revving of the engine maysibly cause engine damage.
!
g
Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a con-ventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is im-printed on the shift knob. The transaxle is fullysynchronized in all forward gears so shifting toeither a higher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.
C070A01O
DRIVING YOUR
C070B01A-AAT
Using the Clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be used after fullyreturning to the original position. Do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal while driving. This cancause unnecessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car
C070D02O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never take the car out of gear anddown a hill. This is extremely hazaAlways leave the car in gear.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causto overheat and malfunction. Insteadyou are driving down a long hill, slowand shift to a lower gear When you d
C070D02O-AAT
Recommended Shift Points
Shift
from-to
1-2
2 3
Recommended
mph (km/h)
15 (20)
25 (40)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 144/253
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the caron an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.Use the parking brake to hold the car on anincline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidlyand repeatedly.
and shift to a lower gear. When you dengine braking will help slow the car
o Slow down before shifting to a loweThis will help avoid over-revving the ewhich can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter crossThis gives you much better control ocar.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped you attempt to shift into reversetransaxle can be damaged if you do nshift into reverse, depress the clutch
the shift lever to neutral, wait three secthen shift to the reverse position.o Exercise extreme caution when drivin
slippery surface. Be especially carefubraking, accelerating or shifting gearsslippery surface, an abrupt change hicle speed can cause the drive whelose traction and the vehicle to go control.
The shift points as shown on the chart arerecommended for optimum fuel economy andperformance.
2-3
3-4
4-5
25 (40)
35 (55)
45 (75)
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
8 OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (2.4L, 2.7L - 4 A/T)
! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted person
C090A01O-GAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pubutton when shifting.
Push the button when shifting
The selector lever can be shifted
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, obattery has been disconnected, m
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 145/253
, p
is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.
NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent wrong selection.
y
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal ction, and the shifting sequence will aafter shifts are cycled a few times bT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).
C090A01O
C
DRIVING YOUR
C090F01O-GAT
Sports Mode (2.4L, 2.7L - 4 A/T)
C090D02O-AAT
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.
The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During "D" range
CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 146/253
!
C090E01O-AAT
o D(Drive):
Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four gear sequence.
o N (Neutral):In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.
C090B02A-AAT
The function of each position is as fol-
lows:
o P (Park):
Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or
while starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.
g g g
operation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.
CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in msports mode is selected by pushing the slever from the "D" position into the manuaTo return to "D" range operation, pus
selector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector levewards and forwards can make rapid geasimple. In contrast to a manual transaxsports mode allows gearshifts with the erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to sone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards oshift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector foor backwards twice, it is possible to sk
gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.
C
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10
!!
o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth driving
CAUTION:o In sports mode, The driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For theengine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the engine
C090I02L-GAT
CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only
the vehicle has completely stoppo Do not accelerate the engine in re
or any of the forward positions wibrakes applied.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 147/253
away on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.
rpm reaches the red zone.o By rapidly moving the selector lever back-
wards (-) twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Sincesudden engine braking and/or rapid ac-celeration can cause a loss of traction,however, downshifts must be made care-fully in accordance with the vehicle'sspeed.
NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four forwardgears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever tothe "R" or "P" position as required.
o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the "ON"
position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.
pp
o Always apply the footbrake whening from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"po
o Do not use the "P" (Park) positplace of the parking brake. Alwathe parking brake, shift the traninto "P" (Park) position and turn oignition when you leave the vehiclemomentarily. Never leave the vunattended while the engine is run
o Check the automatic transaxle fluidregularly, and add fluid as necess
o See the maintenance for the properecommendation.
DRIVING YOUR
OPERATING THE AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE (3.5L - 5 A/T)
C090A02L-AAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and push thebutton when shifting.
Push the button when shifting.
The selector lever can be shifted freely.
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected may be
The indicator lights in the instrument cindicate the selector lever position wh
CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position whvehicle is moving.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 148/253
C090A01O
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas five forward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selected automati-cally, depending on the position of the speedselector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates;the main gate and the manual gate.
NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".
In the main gate, the selector lever has 5positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent wrong selection.
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).
ignition is switched "ON". During sportsoperation, green lights indicate the gearently in use.
C090A02L
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.
C090D02A-AAT
C095F01O-GAT
Sports Mode (3.5L - 5 A/T)C090B01A-AAT
The function of each position is as fol-
lows:
o P (Park):
Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 149/253
o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.
C090E01L-AAT
o D (Drive):
Use for normal driving. This position is used formost city and highway driving, for starting froma full stop to maximum speed. The transaxle willautomatically shift through a five gear sequence.
C
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in msports mode is selected by pushing the selever from the "D" position into the manuaTo return to "D" range operation, pusselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector levewards and forwards can make rapid geasimple. In contrast to a manual transaxsports mode allows gearshifts with the erator pedal depressed.
tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.
CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.
!
DRIVING YOUR
UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backward once to shiftdown one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardsor backwards twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.
NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever tothe "R" or "P" position as required.
o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, de
the brake pedal when shifting fromtral" position or "Park" positionforward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in theposition and the brake pedal fulpressed in order to move the shiftfrom the "P" (Park) position to any
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 150/253
CAUTION:o In sports mode the driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For theengine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.
o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice, it is possible to skipone gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5thto 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.
! o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.
( ) p yother positions.
o It is always possible to shift from"N", "D" position to "P" positionvehicle must be fully stopped to transaxle damage.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
14
!C090N02O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".
WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel
ments, such as sharp lane changfast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision crash, un unbelted p
C090I02L-GAT
CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when
the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse
or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 151/253
o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.
is significantly more likely to die tperson wearing a seatbelt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increayou lose control of your vehicle atway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if tmore wheels drop off the roadwathe driver oversteers to reenter theway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves theway, do not steer sharply. Insteaddown before pulling back into the
lanes.o Never exceed posted speed limits
o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D" posi-tion.
o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.
o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.
o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recomendation.
DRIVING YOUR
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
!C120A02A-AAT
(If installed)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.
WARNING:ABS will not prevent accidents due to im-proper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always
C300A02O-AAT
BRAKE TRACTION CONTROL SYS
(BTCS) (If installed)
On slippery road surfaces, the traction csystem (TCS) limits the drive wheelsspinning excessively, thus helping the accelerate. It also provides sufficient force and steering performance as the caat accelerated speeds.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 152/253
NOTE:During ABS operation, a slight pulsationmay be felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise may beheard in the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.
be reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds:
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-
ted or has different surface height.
The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.
SLIP Control
Limits the drive wheels from spinning esively during starting or while making acated turns on slippery roads to avoid losdriving force of the driven wheels.
Driving hints
TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sdecelerate the car sufficiently before encurves.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
16
C300D02O-AAT
Indicator and Warning
The TCS indicator should illuminate whignition key is turned to ON or START but sgo out after three seconds.If the indicator does not illuminate, have it chby an authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual conditions
d i hil d i i TCS ill i
C300B01O-AAT
TCS ON Mode
When the TCS is running, the TCS indicator inthe instrument cluster will blink.
NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be
turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.
2) Wh h i l i
! CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP func-tion has been activated. It also means thatthe road is slippery or your car is accelerat-ing excessively. In this situation, gentlyrelease foot pressure from the acceleratorpedal and maintain moderate speed.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 153/253
device while driving, TCS illuminates as aing.If TCS illuminates, pull your car to a safeand stop the engine. Then, start the again to check if the TCS indicator goes
If the indicator remains lit even after the ehas been started, have your car checkedauthorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE:When the TCS indicator illuminatestion control is automatically deactfor safety.
2) When the traction control system is op-erating properly, you can feel a slightpulsation in the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control and indicatesnothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click is heardfrom the engine compartment; however,this is only the sound of traction controlbeing checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.
! WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.
DRIVING YOUR
C310A01O-AAT
FULL TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
(FTCS) (3.5 L only) (If installed)
SLIP Control
Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.
Driving hints
TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to
d l t th ffi i tl b f t i
C310B01O-AAT
TCS ON/OFF Mode
When the TCS is running, the TCS indicthe instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing thswitch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come ostay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP cwill be deactivated. Adjust you driving aingly. To turn the system back on, pre
it h i Th TCS OFF i di t h
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 154/253
!
On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car to
accelerate. It also provides sufficient drivingforce and steering performance as the car turnsat accelerated speeds.
HSM434
decelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.
CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP controlhas been activated. It also means that theroad is slippery or your car is acceleratingexcessively. In this situation, release footpressure from the accelerator pedal and
maintain moderate speed.
WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery road surfacesshould be observed.
!
switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator shooff.
NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatica
turned ON after the engine is turnand restarted.
2) When the traction control system erating properly, you can feel a pulsation in the vehicle. This is oneffect of brake control and indnothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click is from the engine compartment; howthis is only the sound of traction cbeing checked.
4) When moving out of the mud orsnow, pressing the accelerator may not cause the engine speed crease due to TCS operation.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION
!WARNING:
This vehicle is designed primarily froad use. Driving the vehicle in challeoff-road conditions for which it wadesigned may result in damage to thhicle. Driving in conditions that exceevehicle's intended design or the d
experience level may result in severe
C310D01O-AAT
Indicators and Warning
The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have it checked by an authorizeddealer.
C350A02O-AAT
(If installed)
Engine power can be delivered to all front andrear wheels for maximum power. Full-time 4WDis useful when good traction is required, suchas, when driving on slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and when moving out of mud.These vehicles, however, are not designed forchallenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD ve-
hicles are designed primarily to improve traction
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 155/253
experience level may result in severe or death.
Driving 4WD Safely
(1)Be sure to wear the seat belt.(2)Do not drive in challenging off-road
tions or areas that exceed the vebasic design intent or the driver's eence level.
(3) Drive at lower speeds in strong cross
Because of your vehicle's high cengravity, its stability will be affected in winds. Slower speeds ensure better vcontrol.
(4) Check the brake condition after drivingor muddy conditions. Press the brakeral times as you move slowly until yonormal braking forces return.
(5) Do not drive the vehicle through watestreams, rivers, lakes, etc.)
Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE:1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,
traction control is automatically deacti-vated for safety.
2) This warning function is not providedwhen the driver selects the TCS-OFFmode.
hicles are designed primarily to improve tractionand performance on paved roads and high-ways in wet and/or slippery conditions. Occa-sional off-road use such as established un-paved roads and trails is OK. It is alwaysimportant when traveling off-highway that thedriver carefully reduce their speed to a level thatdoes not exceed the safe operating speed forthose conditions. In general, off-road conditionsprovide less traction and braking effectivenessthan on road conditions. These factors must becarefully considered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with the drivingsurface and under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for the safetyof him/herself and his or her passengers.
DRIVING YOUR
(6)The stopping distance of the full-time 4WDvehicle differs very little from that of the 2WDvehicle.When driving on a snow-covered road or aslippery, muddy surface, make sure thatyou keep a sufficient distance between yourvehicle and the one ahead of you.
(7) Since the driving torque is always applied tothe 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the con-dition of the tires Be s re to eq ip it ith all
o In rare cases when it's unavoidaba 4WD vehicle is to be inspect
speedometer test on 2WD roll
CAUTION:Never engage the parking brake whilforming these tests.
!o While towing, check the following items.
1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or"ON".
2. Place the shift lever in neutral (ForAutomatic Transaxle, "N" position).
3. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4WD ve-
hicle limit towing to 10 mph and not forth 1 il t ANY TIME
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 156/253
dition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with allfour tires of the same size and type.o When replacement of any of the tires or
disc wheels is necessary, replace all ofthem.
o Rotate the tires and check the tire pres-sure at regular intervals.
(8) The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot betowed by an ordinary tow truck. Makesure that the vehicle is towed with itsfour wheels raised off the ground.
o Roadside Assistance Program:Off-roading is not covered. To receiveservice, the vehicle must be on a publiclymaintained road.
o If the vehicle is towed with its only twowheels raised off the ground, the 4WDsystem could be damaged.
o In unavoidable case, if the vehicle isbeing towed with all four wheels on theground, it should be towed only forwarddirection with rope.
HSM281Roll tester(Speedometer)
Temporary free roller
speedometer test on 2WD roll strictly follow the procedures nex1. Check the tire pressures r
mended for your vehicle.2. Place the front wheels on t
tester for speedometer as shothe illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the rear wheels on the t
rary free roller as shown in the ition.
(9)For speedometer test or inspection/mainte-nance (I/M) program of SANTA FE 4WD,use a four wheel chassis dynamometer.
hicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not formore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.
! WARNING:Keep away from the front of the vwhile inspecting. This is very dangerothe vehicle can jump forward and serious injury or death.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
20LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
! CAUTION:
o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being
!D190A01O-GAT
(If installed)
A limited-slip differential, if equipped, is rear wheel differential only. The featureslimited-slip differential are described belJust as with a conventional differentiawheel on one side is allowed to turn at a dispeed from the wheel on the other side whvehicle is cornering. The difference be
the limited slip differential and a conven
WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane charges orfast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-
way speeds
(10) When using tire chains, always attach themto the front wheels.
(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in themud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WDsystem could be damaged.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 157/253
o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is beingraised on a jack, never start the engine orcause the tires to rotate.There is the danger that rotating tirestouching the ground could cause thevehicle to go off the jack and to jumpforward.
o If one of the front or rear wheels beginsto spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehiclecan sometimes be driven out by de-pressing the accelerator pedal further;however, avoid running the engine con-tinuously at high rpm because doing socould damage the 4WD system.
the limited-slip differential and a convendifferential is that if the wheel on one sidevehicle loses traction, a greater amotorque is applied to the rear wheel on theside to improve traction.
way speeds.o In a collision crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die a per-son weara seatbelt.
o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.
DRIVING YOUR
GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES
o Use caution when parking on a hill. Ethe parking brake and place the geartor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) oror reverse gear (manual transaxle). car is facing downhill, turn the front winto the curb to help keep the car from If your car is facing uphill, turn thewheels away from the curb to help kecar from rolling. If there is no curb orrequired by other conditions to keep tfrom rolling block the wheels
o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents
C130A01A-AAT
WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of thecargo area cover behind the rear seat. Ifthere were an accident or a sudden stop,such objects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-
pants
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 158/253
from rolling, block the wheels.o Under some conditions your parking
can freeze in the engaged position. most likely to happen when there is cumulation of snow or ice around or nerear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Iis a risk that the parking brake may fapply it only temporarily while you pgear selector lever in "P" (automaticfirst or reverse gear (manual transaxlblock the rear wheels so the car cann
Then release the parking brake.o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradthe accelerator pedal. This can cautransaxle to overheat. Always use thepedal or parking brake.
ponents.o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply
the brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.
o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when the car is
stopped.
pants.
o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to
pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly until the braking action returnsto normal, taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soon as it is safeto do so and call your Hyundai dealer forassistance.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
22
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.
o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions
o Remember, your Hyundai does not rextended warm-up. As soon as the eis running smoothly, you can drive awvery cold weather, however, give yogine a slightly longer warm-up period
o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lis driving too slowly in too high a gear ing in the engine bucking. If this hapshift to a lower gear. Over-revving is the engine beyond its safe limit. This avoided by shifting at the recomm
C140A01A-AAT
You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other traffic
so you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 159/253
you drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).
o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.
avoided by shifting at the recommspeeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. Tconditioning system is operated by epower so your fuel economy is rewhen you use it.
so you don t have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.
o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.
DRIVING YOUR
SMOOTH CORNERING
C160A01A-AAT
The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:
C150A01A-AAT
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.
C160B01A-AAT
Snowy or Icy Conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be
WINTER DRIVING
C160C01A-AAT
Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol
Coolant
Your Hyundai is delivered with high ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling sysis the only type of coolant that should bebecause it helps prevent corrosion in theing system, lubricates the water pumprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or r
ish your coolant in accordance with the
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 160/253
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to the
fullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.
NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains.
C160D01A-AAT
Check Battery and Cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the bsystem. Visually inspect the battery and
as described in Section 6. The level of cin your battery can be checked by your Hydealer or a service station.
ish your coolant in accordance with the tenance schedule in Section 5. Before whave your coolant tested to assure tfreezing point is sufficient for the temperanticipated during the winter.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
24
C160I01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake Fre
Under some conditions your parking brafreeze in the engaged position. This islikely to happen when there is an accumof snow or ice around or near the rear bor if the brakes are wet. If there is a riparking brake may freeze, apply it only trarily while you put the gear selector leve
(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (mtransaxle) and block the rear wheels so t
C160G01A-AAT
To Keep Locks from Freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.
C160E01A-AAT
Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if
Necessary
In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 161/253
C160J01A-AAT
Don't Let Ice and Snow Accum
Underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice caup under the fenders and interfere wsteering. When driving in severe winter
tions where this may happen, you shoulodically check underneath the car to be sumovement of the front wheels and the stcomponents is not obstructed.
( ) g (transaxle) and block the rear wheels so tcannot roll. Then release the parking brC160H01A-AAT
Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Window
Washer System
To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved anti-freezesolution in accordance with instructions on thecontainer. Window washer anti-freeze is avail-able from Hyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant or other typesof anti-freeze as these may damage the finish.
C160F01A-AAT
Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
System
Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.
DRIVING YOUR
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
C170A01A-AAT
Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.
NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
C160K01A-AAT
Carry Emergency Equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
USE OF LIGHTS
C180A01A-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correct tion and always keep them clean. Whenduring the day in conditions of poor visiis helpful to drive with headlights on lowThis enables you to be seen as well as
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 162/253
Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.
3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
26 TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING
CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake s
directly to the vehicle brake systeo When towing a trailer on steep grad
excess of 12%) pay close attentionengine coolant temperature gauensure the engine does not overh
the needle of the coolant tempegauge moves across the dial to
!C190A01S-AAT
If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.
C190B01S-AAT
Trailer Hitches
Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.
The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician DO NOT
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 163/253
C190D01S-AAT
Safety Chains
Should the hitch connection between yoand the trailer or vehicle you are towing ftrailer or vehicle could wander dangeacross other lanes of traffic and ultimatelythe roadway. To eliminate this potentialgerous situation, safety chains, attachetween your car and the trailer or towed vare required in most states.
g g"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soit is safe to do so, and allow the eto idle until it cools down. Youproceed once the engine has csufficiently.
!yand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT
USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.
CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.
C190C01Y-AAT
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.
NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.
DRIVING YOUR
NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.
2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-
2). The total gross vehicle weight is the
C190E02O-AAT
Trailer Weight Limit
2.4(2WD)
2.7(2WD)
2.7(4WD)
3 5(2WD)
To
170
120
320(
270(
270(
220
330(
Lbs
Trailer
1700(771)
1200(544)
3200(1452)
2700(1225)
2700(1225)
2200(998)
3300(1497)
Maximum Towable
Type A
Type B
Type A
Type B
Type A
Type B
Type A
With
Brake
Engine
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 164/253
x 100 = 10% (MAX)
combined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.
3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.
Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the cargo area can overloadthe rear axle. Redistribute the load andcheck the axle weight again.
o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.
o Tongue load
o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.
SSA2200B
Total trailer weight
! CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart.
Tongue load Total trailer weight
3.5(2WD)
3.5(4WD)
280
280
230(
100
120
120
150
2800(1270)
2800(1270)
2300(1043)
1000(453)
1200(544)
1200(544)
1500(680)
Type B
Type A
Type B
Without
Brake
WithoutBrake
+ABS
2.4(2WD)
2.7(2WD)
2.7(4WD)
3.5(2WD)
3.5(4WD)
2.4(2WD)
2.7(2WD)2.7(4WD)
3.5(2WD)
3.5(4WD)
Type A : Vehicle carrying 2 passengersType B : Vehicle carrying 5 passengers
2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
28
8. If the trailer has electric brakes, stavehicle and trailer moving, and then aptrailer brake controller by hand to be subrakes are working. This lets you your electrical connection at the sam
9. During your trip, check occasionallysure that the load is secure, and thlights and any trailer brakes are still w
10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden accelerasudden stops.
11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane cha12 Avoid holding the brake pedal down to
!C190F01O-AAT
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.
2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.
3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
tow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear(manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic4 Th bi ti i ht ( f
WARNING:o Improperly loading your car and trailer
can seriously affect its steering and brak-ing performance causing a crash whichcould cause serious injury or death.
o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 165/253
12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down toor too frequently. This could cause the to overheat, resulting in reduced befficiency.
13.When going down a hill, shift into a loweand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downstransaxle to a lower gear and reduce to reduce chances of engine overloand/or overheating.
14.If you have to stop while going uphill, hold the vehicle in place by pressing accelerator. This can cause the auttransaxle to overheat. Use the parkingor footbrake.
15.If the transaxle shifts frequently whileup a hill, shift down one gear.
NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid frequently.
( a ua t a sa e) o o e d e (auto at ctransaxle).
4. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.
5. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.
6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keep
a constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.
7. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.
4. The gross combination weight (sum ofyour vehicle weight plus its load and thetotal trailer weight) must not exceed thefollowing.
4WD
-
7400(3357)
7500(3402)
Lbs. (kg)
2WD
6000(2721)
7700(3493)
7800(3538)
Combination WeightEngine
2.4
2.7
3.5
DRIVING YOUR
CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.
ff
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 166/253
4. While in stop and go traffic, place thegear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.
If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Y C M t b T d 3 10
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 167/253
g gIf Your Car Must be Towed ......................................... 3-10Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-12If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-13
3
32
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
!
D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT
If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns
Over Slowly
D010C01Y-AAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally but
Not Start
1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, ch
connectors at ignition, coil and sparkReconnect any that may be disconnecloose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine roo
4. If engine still refuses to start, call a Hdealer or seek other qualified assist
WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 168/253
dea e o see ot e qua ed ass st
D010D01A-AAT
If Engine Stalls While Driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keestraight line. Move cautiously off the ra safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your v
will not start, contact a Hyundai deaseek other qualified assistance.
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".
D010B01Y
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
JUMP STARTING
o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do
not smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.
Then attach the other end of the sameto the positive (+) post or cable of the bbattery. Next, using the other cable, one clamp to the negative (-) post orof the booster battery. Then attach theend of that cable to a solid metal partengine away from the battery. Do nnect the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with the bbattery and let it run for a few minutes
will help to assure that the booster batfully charged. During the jumping ope
D020A02A-AAT
B t
Dischargedbattery
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 169/253
!
in the vicinity.o The battery being used to provide the jump
start must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.
o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery.
fully charged. During the jumping operun the engine in this vehicle at aboutrpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with thcharged battery using the normal sprocedure. After the engine starts, lea
jumper cables connected and let the run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for sminutes.
6. Carefully remove the jumper cablesreverse order of attachment.
If you do not know why your battery bedischarged (because the lights were leetc.), have the charging system checkyour Hyundai dealer.
WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,
serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.
HSMJ401
Boosterbattery
34
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
!WARNING:
While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or
engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaid l f i
6. If you cannot find the cause of the oveing, wait until the engine temperatureturned to normal. Then, if coolant halost, carefully add coolant to the res(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert fther signs of overheating. If overhhappens again, call a Hyundai deaassistance.
D030A02A-AAT
If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set
the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 170/253
!!
dealer for assistance.
WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.
CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates theleak in the cooling system and this sbe checked as soon as possible by a Hydealer.
turn it off.3. If engine coolant is running out under the car
or steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
SPARE TIRE
D040A01O-GAT
The following instructions for the FULL SIZEspare tire should be observed:
Check inflation pressure as soon as practicalafter installing the spare tire, and adjust to thespecified pressure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintained at thespecified pressure while the tire is stored.
Spare Tire Pressure
D040B02B-GAT
Handling the Spare Tire
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 171/253
Tire Size
Inflation Pressure
Full Size
30 psi (207 kPa)
To remove the spare tire
1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting bolt cover with a
screw driver or coin.
D040B01O3. Loosen the mounting bolt with a whe
wrench.
D0
36
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
D060A01A-AATD050A01A-AAT
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal andlet the car slow down while driving straightahead. Do not apply the brakes immediatelyor attempt to pull off the road as this maycause a loss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safe to doso, brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible and parkon firm, level ground. If you are on a divided
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 172/253
The procedure described on the followingcan be used to rotate tires as well as to ca flat tire. When preparing to change a flcheck to be sure the gear selector lever is(automatic) or reverse gear (manual tranand that the parking brake is set, then:
D
4. Lift up the hanger and separate it from theholder, then lower the hanger and removethe spare tire.
To reinstall the spare tire
1. Set the spare tire on the center of the hanger,
and then raise the hanger and hook it onto theholder.2. Tighten the mounting bolt with the wheel nut
wrench.3. Install the mounting bolt cover with a screw
driver.
, g yhighway, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your emer-gency hazard flashers, set the parking brakeand put the transaxle in "P" (automatic) orreverse (manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the car. Besure they all get out on the side of the car thatis away from traffic.
4. Change the tire following the instructionsprovided on the following pages.
D040B03O
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
D060C01A-AAT
2. Block the WheelD060B02O-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool
Flat tire
D060D01A-AAT
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 173/253
Remove the spare tire and remove the jack andtool bag from the luggage compartment.
NOTE:The spare tire is located underneath the car.
Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite fromthe flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when thecar is raised on the jack.
D060B01O HSM382-1
The wheel nuts should be loosened sbefore raising the car. To loosen the nutthe wrench handle counterclockwise. doing this, be sure that the socket is scompletely over the nut so it cannot slip o
maximum leverage, position the wrench handle is to the left as shown in the drThen, while holding the wrench near the the handle, push down on it with steadysure. Do not remove the nuts at this timloosen them about one-half turn.
D0
38
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!WARNING:
Do not get under the car when it isported by the jack! This is very dangas the vehicle could fall and cause seinjury or death. No one should stay car while the jack is being used.
D060E01A-AAT
4. Put the Jack in PlaceD060F02E-AAT
5. Raising the Car
Wrench bar
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 174/253
The base of the jack should be placed on firm,level ground. The jack should be positioned asshown in the drawing.
After inserting a wrench bar into the wheel nutwrench, install the wrench bar into the jack asshown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turnthe wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jackbegins to raise the vehicle, double check that it
is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jackis on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick,flat stone or other object under the base of the
jack to keep it from sinking.Raise the car high enough so that the fullyinflated spare tire can be installed. To do this,you will need more ground clearance than isrequired to remove the flat tire.
D060E01O-1 HFC4022
Wheel nutwrench
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
D060G02Y-AAT
6. Changing WheelsD060H02O-AAT
7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 175/253
!Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them withyour fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheelon the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up theholes with the studs and slide the wheel onto
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly andget the top hole in the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth untilthe wheel can be slid over the other studs.
WARNING:Wheels and wheel covers may have sharpedges. Handle them carefully to avoid pos-sible severe injury. Before putting the wheelinto place, be sure that there is nothing onthe hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheel fromfitting solidly against the hub. If there is,remove it. If there is not good contact on themounting surface between the wheel andhub, the wheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheelmay result in loss of control of the vehicle.This may cause serious injury or death.
To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studthe wheel nuts on the studs and tightenfinger tight. The nuts should be installetheir small diameter ends directed inward.the tire to be sure it is completely seated
tighten the nuts as much as possible witfingers again.
HSM355
HSM357
310
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR CAR MUST BE TOWED
D080A01A-AATD060I01E-AAT
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten NutsD060J02O-AAT
After Changing Wheels
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICL
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 176/253
!Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheelnut wrench counterclockwise. Then positionthe wrench as shown in the drawing and tightenthe wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not stand on the
wrench handle or use an extension pipe overthe wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening every other nutuntil they are all tight. Then double-check eachnut for tightness. After changing wheels, havea technician tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve capand check the air pressure. If the pressure islower than recommended, drive slowly to thenearest service station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct.
Always reinstall the valve cap after checking oradjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not re-placed, air may leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it as soon aspossible.After you have changed wheels, always securethe flat tire in its place and return the jack andtools to their proper storage locations.
CAUTION:Your car can be damaged if towed rectly!
If your car has to be towed, it should be dyour Hyundai dealer or a commercial towservice. This will help assure that your cadamaged in towing. Also, professionagenerally aware of state and local laws ging towing. In any case, rather than risk dato your car, it is suggested that you shoinformation to the tow truck operator. Bthat a safety chain system is used and tstate and local laws are observed.
D060I01O D040B03O
D0
TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICL
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
!D080B02O-AAT
Towing a Car With Manual TransaxleD080C01O-AAT
Towing a Car With Automatic Tran
CAUTION:o When towing the 2WD vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground, the vehicleshould be towed with wheel lift typetruck.Otherwise, the CV joint boot can inter-fere with the towing hook caused byinsufficient clearance resulting in CV
joint boot damage.o 4 Wheel Drive cannot be towed with a
to tr ck It st be to ed b lifting allo DO NOT TOW 4WD
OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALo DO NOT TOW 4WD
NOT OK FOR AUTOMATIC
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 177/253
o If the car is being towed with the rear wheelson the ground, be sure the parking brake isreleased.
o If the car is being towed with the front wheelson the ground, be sure that the transaxle is
in neutral. Also, be sure that the ignition keyis in the "ACC" position. This is necessary toprevent damage to the steering lock mecha-nism, which is not designed to hold the frontwheels straight while the car is being towed.
o If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged, a towing dollymust be used.
tow truck. It must be towed by lifting all4 wheels.
CAUTION:o A car with an automatic transaxle s
never be towed from the rear wit
front wheels on the ground. Thicause serious damage to the tranIf the car must be towed from the rtowing dolly must be used undefront wheels.
o If the car is being towed with awheels on the ground, it can be only from the front. Be sure thtransaxle is in neutral. Do not tspeeds greater than 30 mph (50
D080B01O-1 D0
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLEWITH NO DAMAGE (except 4WD)
o NOT OK FOR AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
o OK FOR MANUAL TRANSAXLE(except 4WD)
!
312
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D080D01O-AAT
EMERGENCY TOWINGFor emergency towing when no commtow vehicle is available, attach a tow chain or strap to one of the towing hooksthe front/rear of your car. Be very carefuattempting this procedure when the vehicany unpaved surface to avoid damage tvehicle.Nor should towing be attempted if the wdrive train, axles, steering or brakes areaged. Before towing, be sure the transax
neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the eoff) or in the "ON" position (with the erunning). A driver must be in the towed
and for more than 15 miles (25 km). Besure the steering is unlocked by placingthe key in the "ACC" position.A driver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.
<Front>
If the car is being towed with the rear wheels onthe ground, be sure the parking brake is re-leased.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 178/253
running). A driver must be in the towedsteer it and operate the brakes.
NOTE:To avoid serious damage to your 4Whicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and nmore than 1 mile at ANY TIME.
NOTE:Before towing, check the level of thetransaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" markon the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot addfluid, a towing dolly must be used as de-scribed above.
D080C02O
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUALTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
HSM430
HSM235-1
<Rear>
Towing Hook
Towing Hooks
WHAT TO DO IN AN EME
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-AAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 179/253
4
Corrosion Protection ...............................................................4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ...................................................4-2Washing and Waxing ..............................................................4-3Cleaning the Interior ................................................................4-5
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 180/253
4
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
E020B01A-AAT
Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
your car clean and free of corrosive maAttention to the underside of the car is plarly important
E020A01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion from started by observing the following:
E010D01A-AAT
Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-
E010C01A-AAT
High-Corrosion Areas
If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.
E010A01A-AAT
Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation
and assistance is also required.
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSIO
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 181/253
larly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area —road salts are used, near the ocean,with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—should take extra care to prevent coIn winter, hose off the underside of yoat least once a month and be sure tothe underside thoroughly when winover.
o When cleaning underneath the caparticular attention to the components the fenders and other areas that are from view. Do a thorough job; just damthe accumulated mud rather than wasaway will accelerate corrosion rather prevent it. Water under high pressursteam are particularly effective in reaccumulated mud and corrosive ma
Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.
E010B01A-AAT
Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings by
stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARAN
WASHING AND WAXING
E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
M i t ll t d th fl t d
E020D01A-AAT
Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.
E020C01A-AAT
Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion This is particularly true if you
E030A01A-AAT
Washing Your Hyundai
Never wash your car when the surface from being in the sun. Always wash your the shade.
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasivcan scratch the paint if it is not removepollution or acid rain may damage the patrim through chemical action if pollutan
allowed to remain in contact with the surfyou live near the ocean or in an area whesalts or dust control chemicals are use
o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 182/253
Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.
for corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.
salts or dust control chemicals are useshould pay particular attention to the unof the car. Start by rinsing the car to removand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have through mud or muddy water, be sure toughly clean the underside as well. Use direct stream of water to remove accumuof mud or corrosive materials. Use aquality car-washing solution and follomanufacturer's directions on the pacThese are available at your Hyundai deauto parts outlet. Don't use strong houdetergents, gasoline, strong solvents orsive cleaning powders as these may dthe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it freand don't damage the finish by rubbing toFor stubborn spots, dampen them freqand remove them a little at a time.
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
E030D01A-AAT
When to Wax Again
E030C01A-AAT
Polishing and Waxing
Always wash and dry the car before poor waxing or using a combination cleanwax. Use a good quality commercial pand follow the manufacturer's directions container. Polish and wax the bright trim as well as the paint.
If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,
industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove the
l t d di t ild hi l
To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.
To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.
To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-
num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the
h l th hl ft d
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 183/253
You should polish and wax the car againwater no longer beads on a clean surfaspreads out over a larger area.
E030B01A-AAT
Spot Cleaning
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.
accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.
wheels thoroughly afterwards.
After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.
When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.
After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARAN
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E040B01A-AAT
To Clean the Leather Upholstery
(If installed)
In the normal course of use, leather uphosurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dudirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned omay work into the surface of the leather,ing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should be cwhen necessary. Washing leather thorwith soap and water will keep your lustrous beautiful and ensure you have
E040A01A-AAT
To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-
line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.
E030E01A-AAT
Maintaining Bumpers
Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:
o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-
faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 184/253
lustrous, beautiful and ensure you haveyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using ansoap and lukewarm water, work up alather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipewith a slightly damp cloth and dry with sofDo this as often as the leather becomes
During tanning operations, sufficient o
incorporated through processing that nonebe applied during the life of the leathapplied to the finished surface will in no wathe leather and may do more harm thanVarnishes and furniture polishes should be used under any conditions.
and mild soap or car-washing solution.o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-
peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.
4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6 ANY QUESTIONS?
E040C01A-AAT
Cleaning the Carpets
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add
water. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.
E050A01A-AAT
If you have any questions about the care ocar, consult your Hyundai dealer.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 185/253
E040D01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this may
weaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.
5
Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 186/253
5
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2
F010C01A-AAT
Specified Scheduled Procedures
These are the procedures such as inspeadjustments and replacements that are lithe maintenance charts starting on pagThese procedures must be performed intervals shown in the maintenance scheassure that your warranty remains in Although it is strongly recommended thabe performed by the trained technicians a
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may bformed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai s
F010A01A-AAT
Service Requirements
To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply with
the terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further information
F010B01A-AAT
Maintenance Requirements
The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:
o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 187/253
parts be used for any required repairsplacements. Other parts of equivalent such as engine oil, engine coolant, manauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so onare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Compits distributor may be used without affyour warranty coverage but you should abe sure these are equivalent to the qualityoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's book provides further information abouwarranty coverage.
about these warranties.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI
F020A02Y-AAT
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS
o Inspection should be performed any malfunction is experienced or suspe
o Receipts for all emission control sservices should be retained to demoncompliance with conditions of the emisystem warranty.
o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (24km), continue to follow the prescribedtenance intervals.
o For severe usage maintenance re
F010D02A-AAT
General Checks
These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-5.
F010E01A-AAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance
If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number of
F010F01A-AAT
A Few Tips
o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.
o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthi bli ti b h d t
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 188/253
gments, see page 5-6 of this section.
so, you ca spec a d se ce a u be oitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.
this publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
F030B01O-AAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
DESCRIPTIONNo.
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
7.5
12
6
15
24
12
22.5
36
18
30
48
24
37.5
60
30
45
72
36
52.5
84
42
60
96
48
67.5
108
54
75
120
60
82.5
132
66
90
144
72
97.5
156
78
105
168
84
112.5
180
90
120
192
96
127.5
204
102
135
216
108
142
22
11
F030A01A-AAT
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission seto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 189/253
EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
VACUUM HOSES
CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE
VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R R R R
I
I
I
R
R R R
R
I
R
I
I
I
R
R
R R R R
I
I
I
R
R R
R
I
R R
I
I
I
R
R
R R R
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI
F030C05O-AAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
GENERAL ITEMS
DRIVE BELT
COOLANT
TIMING BELT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER
BRAKE FLUID
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. DESCRIPTION
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
2.4 DOHC (ALT, W/PUMP)/3.5 V6(ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)
2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)
7.5
12
6
I
15
24
12
I
I
22.5
36
18
I
30
48
24
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
37.5
60
30
I
45
72
36
I
I
52.5
84
42
I
60
96
48
I
I
R
R*¹
I
I
I
67.5
108
54
I
75
120
60
R
I
82.5
132
66
I
90
144
72
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
97.5
156
78
I
105
168
84
I
R
112.5
180
90
I
120
192
96
I
I
R
R*¹
I
I
I
127.5
204
102
I
135
216
108
I
I
142
228
114
I
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 190/253
Note : *1. For california, this maintenance is recommended, but not required.*2. Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).*3. With LSD- Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) and replace every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
Without LSD- lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM
BALL JOINT
POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES
DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)
REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)
PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
See Note *2
See Note *3
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A02O-AAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appromaintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGSBRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKE
MAINTENANCE ITEM
R
R
RI
I
EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
DRIVINGCONDITIO
MAINTENANCEINTERVALS
MAINTENANCEOPERATION
A, B, C, F, H
C, E
B, HC, D, G, H
C, D, G, H
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 191/253
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeated short distance drivingB - Extensive idlingC - Driving in dusty, rough roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weatherE - Driving in sandy areas
*1. Transfer case Oil and Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weatherabove 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving in mountainous areasH - Towing a trailerI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use and vehicle toJ - Driving over 100 mph
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER
TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1
REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1
I
I
R
R
R
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)
EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)
EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)
EVERY 50,000 MILES (80,000 KM)
With LSD
Without LSD
C, D, E, F, G
C, E, F
A, C, D, E, F, G,
A, C, E, F, G, H,
C, E, G, I
C, E, G, I
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI
F060D01A-AAT
o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions
Ch k th f l li f l h d
F060A01A-AAT F060B01A-AAT
o Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.
F060M01A-AAT
o Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.
F060C01A-AAT
o Fuel Filter
F060F01O-AAT
o Vacuum Hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evideheat and/or mechanical damage. Harbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abraand excessive swelling indicate deterioParticular attention should be paid to exthose hose surfaces nearest to highsources, such as the exhaust manifoldInspect the hose routing to assure th
hoses do not come in contact with ansource, sharp edges or moving compwhich might cause heat damage or mechwear Inspect all hose connections su
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 192/253
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.
wear. Inspect all hose connections, suclamps and couplings, to make sure thsecure, and that no leaks are present. should be replaced immediately if thereevidence of deterioration or damage.
5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
F070D01A-AAT
o Manual Transaxle Oil
Inspect the manual transaxle oil accordthe maintenance schedule.
NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possiblebefore adding oil. Do not overfill.
F070E03A-AAT
o Automatic Transaxle Fluid and F
The fluid level should be in the "HOT" raF060E01A-AAT
o Timing Belt
F060J01A-AAT
o Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.
F060H01A-AAT
o Air Cleaner Filter
A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.
F065F01O-AAT
o Crankcase Ventilation Hose
Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heatand/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittlerubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterioration. Par-ticular attention should be paid to examine thathose surface nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hose
does not come in contact with any heat source,sharp edges or moving component which mightcause heat damage or mechanical wear. In-spect all hose connections, such as clamps and
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 193/253
F070F01A-AAT
o Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation, chcracks, deterioration and any leakage. Reany deteriorated or damaged parts imately.
the dipstick, after the engine and transaxat normal operating temperature. Cheautomatic transaxle fluid level with the erunning and the transaxle in neutral, wparking brake properly applied. Use GENHYUNDAI ATF or DIAMOND ATF SP-IIIATF SP-III when adding or changing fluF070C01A-AAT
o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.
g
Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.
F060G01A-AAT
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.
p , pcouplings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hose should bereplaced immediately if there is any evidence ofdeterioration or damage.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUI
F070L01A-AAT
o Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specified
F070G02A-AAT
o Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.
F070K01A-AAT
o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.
F070H01O-AAT
o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/ Parking Brake
Check the rear brake discs and linings for
F070P01A-AAT
o Driveshafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamk d i i d R l
F070N01A-AAT
o Power Steering Pump, Belt and H
Check the power steering pump and hosleakage and damage. Replace any damaleaking parts immediately. Inspect the steering belt for evidence of cuts, crackcessive wear, oiliness and proper teReplace or adjust it if necessary.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 194/253
torque.
F070J01A-AAT
o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
Check the rear brake discs and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.
F070M01A-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/
Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check
for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.
F070Q01A-AAT
o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and cotions for leakage and damage. Check aditioning performance according to the reshop manual if necessary.
cracks, deterioration, or damage. Repladamaged parts and, if necessary, repagrease.
6
Engine Compartment ..............................................................6-2General Checks .......................................................................6-5Checking the Engine Oil ........................................................ 6-6Changing the Oil and Filter .................................................... 6-7Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant .................... 6-8Spark Plugs ........................................................................... 6-10Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ......................................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) .............................. 6-13Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) 6 14
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 195/253
6Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) ..................... 6-14Checking the Brakes ........................................................... 6-16Checking the Clutch Fluid .................................................. 6-17Air Conditioning Care........................................................... 6-18Checking Drive Belts ........................................................... 6-20Checking and Replacing Fuses........................................ 6-21
Checking the Battery ........................................................... 6-22Power Steering Fluid Level ................................................ 6-24Replacement of Light Bulbs ............................................... 6-26Bulb Wattage ......................................................................... 6-33Fuse Panel Description....................................................... 6-34
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010A01O-AAT
(2.4 DOHC)
1 2 3 4
CAUTION:
When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.
!
5
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 196/253
6 7 8 9 10 11
1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick
9. Radiator cap10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst
(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)11. Battery
g g
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G010B01O-AAT
(2.7 V6)1 2 3 4
CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic co
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 197/253
1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir3. Air cleaner4. Fuse and Relay box
5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir6. Power steering fluid reservoir7. Engine oil level dipstick8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil filler cap10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst
(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)11. Battery
G
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
4
G010C01O-AAT
(3.5 V6)
1 3 4 5
CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the eyou should handle tools and other objects carefully so that the plastic co
!
2
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 198/253
1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse and Relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil level dipstick10. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipst11. Battery
6 7 8 9 10 11
objects carefully so that the plastic cothe engine is not damaged.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
GENERAL CHECKS
G020C01A-AAT
Vehicle Interior
The following should be checked eachwhen the vehicle is driven:
o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (a
conditioning, if installed)
o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation including parking b
G020B01A-AAT
Vehicle Exterior
The following should be checked monthly:
o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade condition
o Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition
(including spare tire)
G020A01A-AAT
Engine Compartment
The following should be checked regularly:
o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Clutch fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid level
o Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery condition
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 199/253
o Brake operation, including parking bo Manual transaxle operation, including
operationo Automatic transaxle operation, inc
"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation
If you notice anything that does not ocorrectly or appears to be functioning coinspect it carefully and seek assistanceyour Hyundai dealer if service is neede
(including spare tire)o Battery conditiono Air filter condition
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
G030A01A-AAT
Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.
G030C02A-AAT
To Check the Oil Level
G030B01A-AAT
Recommended Oil
Before checking the oil, warm up the engthe normal operating temperature and byour car is parked on level ground. Tuengine off.
Wait five minutes , then remove the dwipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and wiit again. Then note the highest level the reached on the dipstick. It should be bethe upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW")
G030D01A-AAT
Adding Oil
2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6
2 4 DOHC 27 V6
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 200/253
SH, SG or SG/CD (API) multi-grade and fuelefficient oil is recommended.
HSM395
HSM3892.4 DOHC 2.7 V6
HSM427
3.5 V6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER
If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark
HSM426
G040A03A-GAT The engine oil and filter should be chanthose intervals specified in the mainteschedule in Section 5. If the car is being in severe conditions, more frequent oil anchanges are required.
The procedure for changing the oil and as follows:
1. Park the car on level ground and sparking brake. Start the engine and
warm up until the needle on the ctemperature gauge moves above the mark. Turn the engine off and place thselector lever in "P" (automatic) or r
( l t l )HSM394
2.4 DOHC 2.7 V63.5 V6
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 201/253
!
If the oil level is close to or below the L mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.
The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.
gear (manual transaxle).2. Open the hood and remove the eng
filler cap.3. Slide underneath the car and loos
drain plug by turning it counterclockwisa wrench of the proper size. Be sure drain pan is in position to catch the odrains out, then remove the drain plu
G040A02L
WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engas it may be hot enough to burn you
3.5 V6
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8 CHECKING AND CHANGING T
ENGINE COOLANT
!
G050A01A-AAT
WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap wheengine is hot. When the engine is hoengine coolant is under pressure anderupt through the opening if the cremoved. You could be seriously buryou do not observe this precaution. D
remove the radiator cap until the radicool to the touch.
4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new washer andretighten by turning it clockwise.
Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure to
have your drain pan in place underneath it.6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the
instructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :1 2 1 6 kgf m) Be s re that the mo nting
!PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after handlingused oil.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 202/253
!1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mountingsurface on the engine is clean and that theold gasket is removed completely. Lubricatethe new gasket on the filter with clean engineoil before installation.
7. Refill the crankcase with the recommendedengine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.
8. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
9. Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.
NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the household
trash.
WARNING:Used motor oil may cause irritation or can-cer of the skin if left in contact with the skinfor prolonged periods of time. Wash yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handling
used oil.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G050B01A-AAT
Recommended Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration of
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.
G050C01A-AAT
To Check the Coolant LevelG050D02A-AAT
To Change the Engine Coolant
The engine coolant should be changed atintervals specified in the vehicle mainteschedule in Section 5.
CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finyour car. If you spill engine coolant ocar, wash it off thoroughly with clean
1. Park the car on level ground, set theing brake and remove the radiator capcool.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 203/253
g
Ambient
temperature
°F (°C)
5 (-15)
-13 (-25)
-31 (-35)
-49 (-45)
65%
60%
50%
40%
35%
40%50%
60%
WaterAntifreeze
solution
Engine Coolant concentration The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cool. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,
inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.
G050C01O
G
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwiseout pressing down on it, until it stopsrelieves any pressure remaining in theing system. And remove the radiator cpushing down and turning countewise.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 0 SPARK PLUGS
!
G060A02Y-AAT
2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6 / 3.5 V
0 . 0
3 9
~ 0 . 0
4 3
i n . ( 1 . 0 ~ 1 . 1
m m )
0 . 0
3 9
~ 0 . 0
4 3
i n . ( 1 . 0 ~ 1 . 1
m m )
WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-
ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.
4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.
5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized ordistilled water. Continue to add clean dem-
ineralized or distilled water in small quantitiesuntil the fluid level stays up in the radiatorneck.
7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 204/253
Your engine was originally equipped withnum-tipped spark plugs.Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longeconventional type spark plugs and cidentified by blue lines on the ceramic s
NOTE:
Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped plugs.
6. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "L" and "F".
creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.
G050D02O
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G060B02O-AAT
Replacing the Spark Plugs
The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use spark
plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.
NOTE:
G060C0IO-AAT
Changing the Spark Plugs
G C O
G
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 205/253
o When replacing the spark plug, genuineHyundai replacement parts are recom-mended.
o It is recommended that the spark plugshould be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer. (2.7 L, 3.5 L)
Recommended Spark Plugs:
Type
RN10PYP4 (CHAMPION)
PGR5C-11 (NGK)
RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)
PFR5N-11 (NGK)
Remark
2.4 L
2.7 L / 3.5 L
!You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.
1. Remove the center cover (2.4 L) on the
engine rocker cover.2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that has
accumulated around the base of the sparkplug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when thespark plug is removed.
3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straightup on the insulated connector, not the cable.Pulling on the cable may damage the carboncore conductor.
G060C01O
WARNING:It is recommended that the engine beor cold when changing the spark pluthe engine is hot, you could burn yoon the insulated connector, the sparkor the engine itself.
4. When preparing to remove the oldplug, guide the socket down over theplug, being careful not to damage tramic insulator.
5. To remove the old spark plug, tuwrench handle in a counterclockwisetion.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 2 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADESCHANGING THE AIR CLEANER
FILTER
G080A02A-AAT
The wiper blades should be carefully ins
G070A01E-AAT
To change the filter unsnap the clips around the
G070A01O
6. To install the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 206/253
The wiper blades should be carefully insfrom time to time and cleaned to removemulations of road film or other debris. Tothe wiper blades and arms, use a clean sor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and If the wipers continue to streak or smeglass, replace them with genuine Hyund
placement parts or their equivalent.
To change the filter, unsnap the clips around thecover. When this is done, the cover can be liftedoff, the old filter removed and the new filter putin its place. Genuine Hyundai ReplacementParts are recommended.
CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a proper
air filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear.
o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.
!! CAUTION:
o Do not operate the wipers on dry This can result in more rapid wear wiper blades and may scratch the
o Keep the blade rubber out of cwith petroleum products such as eoil, gasoline, etc.
G060C03O
NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened to speci-fication. Over-tightening can damage thethreads in the aluminum cylinder head.
Also, leaving them too loose can cause thespark plug to get very hot and possiblyresult in damage to the engine.
7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulatedconnector directly down onto the electrode.Check to be sure it has snapped into placeand can't fall off.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE O
(MANUAL)
FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR
G090A01O-AAT
The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the
CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be operated if thewasher reservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.
G090A01O
!G100A02O-AAT
Transaxle lubricant in the manual tra
Filler plug
Drain plug
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 207/253
The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.
The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).
Transaxle lubricant in the manual trashould be checked at those intervals spin the vehicle maintenance schedule in 5.
Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS75W/90 (API GL-4) or EQUIVALENT manual transaxle.
Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity
The oil capacity of the manual transaxle U.S. quarts (2.3 liters).
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 4 CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE
FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
G110A01E-AAT
Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle be checked at those intervals specified vehicle maintenance schedule in Section
NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basicallcolor. As driving distance increasefluid color turns darkish red graduallya normal condition and you shouljudge the need to replace based upo
changing color.You must replace the automatic tranfluid in accordance with intervals spin the vehicle maintenance schedusection 5
!
G100B02A-AAT
To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid
Level
WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.
Park the car on level ground with the engine off.
1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.
2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel insidethe hole. The oil level should be at its bottomedge. If it is not, check for leaks beforeadding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring theoil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches theproper level. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 208/253
section 5.
SSA6100B
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G110D02O-AAT
To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level
C090A01O
G110C01O-AAT
Transaxle Fluid Capacity
The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is8.98 U.S. quarts (8.5 liters).
G110B03A-AAT
Recommended Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF or DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III.Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is notcovered by your new vehicle limited warranty.
2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe itreinsert the dipstick as far as it will go
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 209/253
! Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.
While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions —"R", "N", "D" —and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:
1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.
WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot
so you should exercise great care not toburn yourself during this procedure.
reinsert the dipstick as far as it will goremove it again. Now check the fluid lethe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT"on the dipstick.
3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use ato add transaxle fluid through the dtube until the level reaches the "HOT"
Do not overfill.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 6 CHECKING THE BRAKES
G120D01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level
The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir be checked periodically. The level shobetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on thof the reservoir. If the level is at or belo
G120C02A-AAT
Recommended Brake Fluid
Use only hydraulic brake fluid conformDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your system. Follow the instructions printed ocontainer.
G120B01A-AAT
Checking the Brake Fluid Level!
HJM5044
Fluid level should be within "HOT" range
G120A01A-AAT
CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 210/253
"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it"MAX". Do not overfill.
!
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.
!WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G120E02A-AAT
Adding Brake Fluid
HSM158
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID
G130A01A-AAT
To Check the Clutch Fluid
HSM158
!
G130B02A-AAT
To Replace the Fluid
Recommended brake fluid conforming to3 or DOT 4 specification should be usereservoir cap must be fully tightened tocontamination from foreign matter or m
NOTE:Do not allow any other liquids to conate the brake fluid. Seal damage will
WARNING:Use caution when handling brake flcan damage your vision if you get it in
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 211/253
! WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a
sealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.
To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.
The clutch fluid level in the master cylindershould be checked when performing other un-der hood services. The system should bechecked for leakage at the same time. Checkto make certain that the clutch fluid level isalways between the "MAX" and "MIN" level
markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch systemwhich should be inspected and repaired imme-diately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.
g y y geyes. It will also damage your vepaint if spilled on it and not removed diately.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 8 AIR CONDITIONING CARE
When the air conditioning is being usedlarly, the compressor drive belt tension
G140D02A-AAT
Checking the Compressor Drive Belt
2.7 V6 2.4 DOHC
Auto tensioner
G
3.5 V6
Crank shaft apulley A/C pulley
Power steering pulley Genera
G140A01A-AAT
Keeping the Condenser Clean
The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.
G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.
G140B01A-AAT
Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-
tion
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 212/253
y, pbe checked at least once a month wengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press dothe belt halfway between the engine craand compressor pulleys. Pressing withfinger, you should not be able to deflect th
anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the beltloose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai
HSM396
COMP
Eng.pulley Eng.pulleyCOMP
0.315 in.
!
1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY
G160A01A-AAT
CLUTCH PEDAL
G160A01E
0.24 ~ 0.51 in.(6 ~ 13 mm)
G170A01A-AAT
BRAKE PEDAL
H
0.12 ~ 0.31(3 ~ 8 mm)
G150A01A-AAT
STEERING WHEEL
G150A01O
1.18 in.
(30 mm)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 213/253
With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if
necessary.
With the engine off, press down on thepedal several times to reduce the vacuumbrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowthe brake pedal until you feel a chanresistance. This is the brake pedal free
The free-play should be within the limits fied in the illustration above. If it is not, inspected by your Hyundai dealer and aor repaired if necessary.
To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater than
specified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 0 CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
CLEARANCE
CHECKING DRIVE BELTS
G180A01A-AAT
You need a helper to check the brake pedall With th i i h
G180A01L
2.95 in. (75 mm)
Drive belts should be checked periodicaproper tension and adjusted if necessary. same time, belts should be examined for wear, fraying or other evidence of deterand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to bthere is no interference between the belother parts of the engine. After a belt is repthe new belt should be adjusted again afor three weeks to eliminate slack resultininitial stretching after use.
G190A01A-AAT
HSM396
2.7 V6 2.4 DOHC
COMP
Eng.pulley Eng.pulleyCOMP
0.315 in.
Power steeringPower steering
Auto tensioner
GeneratorGenerator
Eng.coolant
0.30~0.48 in. 0.24~0.35 in.
35 V6
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 214/253
clearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.
G140D02L
3.5 V6
Crank shaft apulleyA/C pulley
Power steering pulley Generator
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
CHECKING AND REPLACING
FUSES
!
G200B01A-AAT
Replacing Accessory Fuses
CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.
If any of your car's lights or other eleaccessories stop working, a blown (opencould be the reason. If the fuse has openewill see that the metal strip inside the fusmelted through. If you suspect a blownfollow this procedure:
1. Turn off the ignition and all other sw2. Open the fuse box and examine eac
Remove each fuse by pulling it towa(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained
fuse box to simplify this operation).3. Be sure to check all other fuses evenfind one that appears to have opene
G200A02A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link
G200A01L
Good Open-Replace
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 215/253
The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found low on the dashboardon the driver's side. Inside the box you will finda list showing the circuits protected by eachfuse.
HSM391
A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,
repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box foreasy inspection.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 2 CHECKING THE BATTERY
!4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new
fuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.
CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is a prob-lem in the electrical circuit. If you replace afuse and it blows as soon as the accessoryis turned on, the problem is serious andshould be referred to a Hyundai dealer fordiagnosis and repair. Never replace a fusewith anything except a fuse with the sameor a lower amperage rating. A higher capac-
ity fuse could cause damage and create afire hazard.
!
G210A01A-AAT
D0
NOTE:See page 6-34 for the fuse panel descrip-
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 216/253
G200B03Y
Good Open-Replace
! WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When wwith batteries, carefully observe the ing precautions to avoid serious inj
The fluid in the battery contains a strong sof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on youthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yoimmediately do the following:
p g p ptions.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLIN
FANS
!
!
G220A01A-AAT
WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by ecoolant temperature and may someoperate even when the engine is noning. Use extreme caution when wnear the blades of the cooling fan, syou are not injured by a rotating fan As the engine coolant temperatur
creases the fan will automatically shThis is a normal condition.
G210B03A-AAT
Checking the Battery
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk of
magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.
While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicals
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 217/253
y g y g )they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:
o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.
o Keep children away from the area.
Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 4 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
G230A03A-AAT
G220C01A-AAT
Checking Condenser Cooling Fan
The condenser cooling fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.
The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly To check the power steering fluid
G230A01O
G240A01A-AAT
POWER STEERING HOSES
It is suggested that you check the power
ing hose connections for fluid leakage atintervals specified in the vehicle mainteschedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be reif there is severe surface cracking, pscuffing or worn spots Deterioration of the
Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid
NOTE:Do not start the engine when the steering oil reservoir is empty.
G220B01A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan
The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 218/253
regularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then checkto make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.
NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.
G250A01A-AAT
FOR MORE INFORMATION A
YOUR HYUNDAIIf you desire additional information abouttaining and servicing your Hyundai, yopurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hdealer's parts department. This is themanual used by dealership technicianwhile it is highly technical it can be usobtaining a better understanding of your chow it works.
scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of thecould cause premature failure.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
G290B01O-AAT
Adjustment After Headlight Asse
Replacement
G
L
W
H
Cut-off line
Ground
Horizontal line
Vertica
6. Draw the vertical line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) and the hori-zontal line (through the center of each head
G290A01O
Verticalaiming
G290A02O-AAT
Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press
the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and
spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the
headlights (Low beam).5. Open the hood.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 219/253
If the vehicle has had front body repair aheadlight assembly has been replaceheadlight aiming should be checked usaiming chart as shown in the illustration. Tthe headlight switch. (Low Beam Positio
1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of parallel to center line of the body aligned with point "P" shown in the illus
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show theof headlights.
G
!
zontal line (through the center of each head-light beam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -
VERTICAL AIMING.
WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted byan authorized Hyundai dealer.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 6 REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS
!
G260A02A-AAT
Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.
See page 6-33 for the wattage description.
CAUTION:Keep the lamps out of contact with petro-leum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.
SPECIFICATION:
"H";Horizontal center line of headlights fromground: 2WD : 32.5 in.(822 mm)
4WD : 33.3 in.(843 mm)"W";Distance between each headlight center:46.5 in.(1,178 mm)
"L";
Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against:118 in. (3,000 mm).
G270A01O-AAT
Headlight and Front Turn Signal L
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye pro2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic
avoid touching the glass.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 220/253
4. Using a socket wrench of the correc
remove the headlight assembly mobolts.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.
5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.
HSM328
HSM329
8. Push the bulb spring to remove the hebulb.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 221/253
G270A01O
7. Disconnect the connector from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2 8
! WARNING:
G
12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,remove from the bulb holder and install thenew bulb.
HSM332
9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlight
HSM331
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 222/253
WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas undersure and if impacted could shatter, ing in flying fragments. Always weaprotection when servicing the bulb. Pthe bulb against abrasions or scra
and against liquids when lighted. Tubulb on only when installing in a heaReplace the headlight if damaged or crKeep the bulb out of the reach of chand dispose of the used bulb with c
atc g t e pastc base t t e ead g thole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.
10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G270B01O-AAT
Rear Combination Light1. Open the tail gate.2. Remove the mounting screws as shown
with a phillips screwdriver.
HSM352
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
HSM423
G270C01O-AAT
Luggage Compartment Light
1. Open the tail gate.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 223/253
HSM337
3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/ tail light, turn signal light, back-up light, sidemark light), take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.
(1) Stop/Tail light(2) Turn signal light(3) Back-up light(4) Side mark light
4. Install the new bulb.
p g2. Remove the cover with a flat-head
driver.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3 0
G270E01O-AAT
Front Side Mark Light
1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw-
HSM3342. Disconnect the connector.
HSM342
3. Replace with a new bulb.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 224/253
driver.
3. Replace with a new bulb.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G270G01O-AAT
Interior Light
HSM343
1. Remove the cover with a flat-head screw-
HSM344
2. Replace with a new bulb.
G270H01O-AAT
Glove Box Illuminated Light
1. Open the glove box.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 225/253
driver. 2. Remove the cover with a flat-head driver.
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3 2
G270E02L
3. Disconnect the connector.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 226/253
HTB284
4. Replace with a new bulb.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
BULB WATTAGE
G280A02O-AAT
1
2
3 4
6 7 8
9
10
12 G
11
5
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 227/253
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Part Name
Head Light (Low/High)
Front Fog Light (If installed)
Turn Signal Light
Side Mark Light
Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)
Glove Box Illuminated Light
Map Light
Interior Light
Wattage
55/60
27
28
5
5
10
15
10
No.
9
10
11
12
Wattag
17
10
5
27/8
27
27
5
Part Name
High Mounted Rear Stop Light
Luggage Compartment Light
License Plate Light
Rear Combination Light
Stop/Tail Light
Turn Signal Light
Back-up Light
Rear Side Mark Light
6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3 4 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
G200C01O-AAT
Engine CompartmentFUSE
RATING
120A
50A
50A
40A
30A
30A
40A
30A
40A
20A
15A
10A
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Generator
Tail lamp relay, Fuse 11~17, Power connector
Start relay, Ignition switch
A/C Fuse, Blower relay
ABS control module, Air bleeding connector
ABS control module, Air bleeding connector
Engine contorl relay
Power window relay, Fuse 26
Radiator fan relay
Condenser fan relay
Fog lamp relay
Left head lamp Instrument cluster DRL control modu
ALT
B+
IGN
BLR
ABS.1
ABS.2
ECU
P/W
RAD FAN
C/FAN
FRT FOG
H/LP(LH)
FUSIBLE
LINK
DESCRIPTION
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 228/253
G200C01O-A
NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
10A
10A
20A
20A
10A15A
20A
10A
10A
10A
Left head lamp, Instrument cluster, DRL control modu
Right head lamp
Ignition failure sensor, Oxygen sensor
Injector
Check engine ind, ECM, PCMFuel pump relay, ECM, TCM, Generator, PCM
ATM contorl relay, 4WD control module
Horn relay
A/C relay
PCM, ECM
H/LP(LH)
H/LP(RH)
ECU #1
ECU #2
ECU #3ECU(B+)
ATM
HORN
A/C
ST SIG
FUSE
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINT
G200E01O-AAT
Inner Panel PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Cigarette lighter & Power outlet
Audio, Power outside mirror
Digital clock, Rear power outlet
Cruise control
Head lamp relay
Seat warmer
Rear wiper motor control
Rear window defogger, Power outside mirror
A/C control, Sunroof controller, Electrical chrome mirror
(Not used)
Room lamp, Door warning switch, Door lamp, Manual A/C control, Homelink controDigatal clock, ETACM, Audio, Siren
AMP speakers
Stop lamp, Data link connector, Multipurpose check connector
Hazard lamp
Power seat, Rear wiper motor control
Sunroof controller
D f l
FUSERATING
20A
10A
15A
10A
10A
25A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
15A
20A
10A
10A
25A
20A
30A
FUSE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 229/253
G200E01O-A
Defogger relay
Instrument cluster, Pre-excitation resistor, ETACM, Auto light sensor,
DRL control module, Generator
SRS control module
ECM (V6 2.7L), PCM (I4 with A/T), ECM (I4 with M/T)
Instrument cluster (Air bag IND)
ABS control module, G-Sensor, Air bledding connector, 4WD control moduleTurn signal lamp
Back-up lamps, TCM, Vehicle speed secsor, ETS control module, Ignition failure s
Door lock/unlock relay, Key lock/unlock relay
Tail & parking lamp (LH), Turn signal lamp, License lamp
Tail & parking lamp (RH), Fog lamp relay, Switch illumination
ETS control module (V6 3.5L), Fail safety relay
Radiator fan relay, Condenser fan relay
Front wiper motor, Wiper relay, Washer motor
30A
10A
15A
10A
10A
10A10A
10A
20A
10A
10A
15A
10A
20A
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F31
7
Emission Control System ...................................................... 7-2EGR System ............................................................................7-3Catalytic Converter .................................................................7-3
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 230/253
7
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
H010B01A-AAT1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies filtered air to thecrankcase through the air intake hose. Insidethe crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through the PCV valveand into the induction system.
H010A02O-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel taabsorbed and stored in the canister. Whengine is running, the fuel vapors absorthe canister are drawn into the induction through the purge control solenoid valv
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PC
The purge control solenoid valve is coby the Engine Control Module (ECM); wh
engine coolant temperature is low duringthe PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel taken into the engine. After the engine wup during ordinary driving, the PCSV opintroduce evaporated fuel to the engine
H010C01S-AAT
2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-
ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor
R ) S
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 231/253
H010D01A-AAT
3. Exhaust Emission Control Sys
The Exhaust Emission Control System
highly effective system which controls eemissions while maintaining good vperformace.
Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control Sys-tem)
o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, discon-nect the ABS connector in the enginecompartment. (2.7 V6 only)
o For more information, see shop manual(Wheel Speed Sensor).
o After dynamometer testing is completed,erase the ABS/TCS DTC (DiagnoticTrouble Code) with a GST (Generic ScanTool) or Hi-Scan Pro.
Recovery) System
The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from of the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)
EMISSION CONTROL
CATALYTIC CONVERTEREGR SYSTEM
!H010E01Y-AAT(If installed)
This system helps reduce nitrogen oxides byrecirculating a part of the exhaust gas into theengine, thereby reducing cylinder combustiontemperature, which results in lower output ofoxides of nitrogen.
WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good ope
condition. Extremely high catalyticverter temperatures can result froproper operation of the electricaltion or multiport electronic fuel tion.
o If your engine stalls, pings, knockshard to start, have your Hyundai inspect and repair the problem asas possible.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuelRunning out of gasoline may causengine to misfire and result in damthe catalytic converter.A id idli th i f
H020A01A-AAT
All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and
H020A01O
Catalytic Converter
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 232/253
o Avoid idling the engine for plonger than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be pushpulled to get started. This may causcatalytic converter to overheat an
ate a fire hazard.o Do not touch the catalytic converany other part of the exhaust swhile the catalytic converter is hotoff the engine, wait for at least onebefore touching the catalytic conor any other part of the exhaust s
o Remember that your Hyundai deayour best source of assistance.
nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust may
cause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:
7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
4
!WARNING:
o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 233/253
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....................................8-2Engine Number ........................................................................8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures .....................................8-2Snow Tires ................................................................................ 8-3Tire Chains ................................................................................ 8-3Tire Rotation..............................................................................8-4
Tire Balancing...........................................................................8-4Tire Traction ..............................................................................8-4When to Replace Tires...........................................................8-4Spare Tire and Tools ..............................................................8-5Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .................................8-5Consumer Information 8 6
CONSUMER INFORMATION &
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
8
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 234/253
Consumer Information ............................................................8-6Reporting Safety Defects ...................................................... 8-8 8
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
2 TIREENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
I030A02S-AAT
RECOMMENDED INFLATION
SURES
I020A01A-AAT
TIRE INFORMATION
The tires supplied on your new Hyundchosen to provide the best performannormal driving.
I010B01A-AATI010A02A-AAT
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It
I010A01OI010B01O
2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6
3.5 V6
2 3
1 4
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 235/253
g p g pcan be found in four different places on your car:
1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.
2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.
3. Door edge post.4. On the lower side of the center pillar outer
panel.
The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.
The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel gives the tire prerecommended for your vehicle.
I
I010B01L
CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY
I040A01O-AAT
SNOW TIRES
If you equip your car with snow tires, they shouldbe the same size and have the same loadcapacity as the original tires. Snow tires shouldbe installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poorhandling may result.S ti h ld 4 i (28 kP ) i
RIM
SIZE
TIRE
SIZE
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
UP TO 2 PERSONS UP TO MAX.LOAD
FRONT
207(30)
REAR
207(30)
FRONT
221(32)
REAR
221(32)225/70R166.5Jx16
These pressures were chosen to provide themost satisfactory combination of ride comfort,tire wear and stability under normal conditions.Tire pressures should be checked at leastmonthly. Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:
o Lower-than-recommended tire pressurescause uneven tread wear and poor handling.
o Higher-than-recommended tire pressuresincrease the chance of damage from im-pacts and cause uneven tread wear.
o Never overload your car. Be especiallycareful about overloading if you equipyour car with a luggage rack or car topcarrier.
CAUTION:!
!
I050A03A-AAT
TIRE CHAINS
Tire chains, if necessary, should be instathe front wheels. Be sure that the chaiinstalled in accordance with the manufainstructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do not cto use tire chains when they are no needed.
WARNING:o When driving on roads covered
snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mkm/h).
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire & chains.
o If you have noise caused by chain
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 236/253
!Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more airpressure than the pressure recommended forthe standard tires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever
is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)when your car is equipped with snow tires.
CAUTION:Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tires are cold.That is, after the car has been parked forat least three hours and hasn't beendriven more than one mile or 1.6 km sincestarting up.
o Check the pressure of your spare tireeach time you check the pressure ofother tires.
o If you have noise caused by chaintacting the body, retighten the chavoid contact with the vehicle bo
o To prevent body damage, retightechains after driving 0.3 ~ 0.6 miles
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
4
I080A01A-AAT
TIRE TRACTION
Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worntires, tires that are improperly inflated or onli d f Ti h ld b
I070A01A-AAT
TIRE BALANCING
A tire that is out of balance may affect handlingand tire wear. The tires on your Hyundai werebalanced before the car was delivered but mayneed balancing again during the years you ownthe car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, itshould be rebalanced before being reinstalledon the car.
I090A01A-AAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES
The original tires on your car have treadindicators. The tread wear indicators awhen the tread depth is 0 06 in (1 6 mm
Wear ind
0.06 in. (1.6 mm)
I060A01O-AAT
TIRE ROTATION
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles(12,000 km). If you notice that tires are wearingunevenly between rotations have the car
HA1409Spare tire
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 237/253
slippery road surfaces. Tires should be re-placed when tread wear indicators appear. Toreduce the possibility of losing control, slowdown whenever there is rain, snow or ice on theroad.
when the tread depth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mmtire should be replaced when these appa solid bar across two or more grooves tread. Always replace your tires with ththe recommended size. If you change w
the new wheel's rim width and offset musHyundai specification.
!
unevenly between rotations, have the carchecked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause maybe corrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressures and besure to check wheel nut torque.
CAUTION:Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply underany circumstances. This may cause dan-gerous handling characteristics.
CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS
!I100A02E-AAT
WARNING:o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous!
Worn-out tires can cause loss of brakingeffectiveness, steering control and trac-tion. When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-plytires, they must be installed in sets offour.
o Using tires and wheels of other than therecommended sizes could cause un-usual handling characteristics that couldcause death, serious injury, or propertydamage.
o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's di-mensional specifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to the vehicle,
Your Hyundai is delivered with the following:
Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench Wrench bar
D060B01O
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUN
VEHICLE
I120A02A-AAT
o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Warranty.
o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Mileited Powertrain Warranty (original only).
o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal o California Emission Control System
ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty F
vehicle
o Replacement Parts and Accessoriesited Warranty
NOTE:Detailed warranty information is proin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 238/253
I110A01A-AAT
SHOP MANUALA Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.
and result in damage to the vehicle,including broken wheel studs.
Wheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
6 CONSUMER INFORMATION
WARNING:The traction grade assigned to this based on straight-ahead braking trtests, and does not include accelecornering, hydroplaning, or peak trcharacteristics.
Temperature A, B, C - The temperature are A (the highest), B, and C, representitire's resistance to the generation of heaits ability to dissipate heat when tested controlled conditions on a specified indooratory test wheel. Sustained high tempecan cause the material of the tire to degeand reduce tire life, and excessive tempcan lead to sudden tire failure. The grcorresponds to a level of performance wh
I130A01A-AAT
This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.
I130B03A-AAT
Tire Quality Grading
Department of Transportation quality grades -All passenger vehicle tires must conform toFederal Safety Standards in addition to thesegrades. These quality grades are molded on thesidewall.
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a com-parative rating based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example,a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1- 1/2) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in road char-
!
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 239/253
p ppassenger car tires must meet under theeral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard NoGrades B and A represent higher levperformance on the laboratory test whee
the minimum required by law.
service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction grades,from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stopon wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test sur-faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.
CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY
!WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Quality gradescan be found on the tire sidewall between thetread shoulder and the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:
Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.
Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesotabraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Wisconsin.
Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizonafornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada
Mexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, WashiWyoming.
Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-085(800) 633 5151
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 240/253
I130D03A-AAT
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING" .
Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151
(800) 633-5151
8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
8 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
I130C01A-AAT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either call theA t S f t H tli t ll f t 1 888 327
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 241/253
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Departmentof Transportation, Washington. D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
9
Measurement ............................................................................9-2Engine .........................................................................................9-3Lubrication Chart .....................................................................9-4
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 242/253
9
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J040A02O-AAT
ELECTRICAL
J030A01O-AAT
TIRE
J020A01O-AAT
POWER STEERING
J010A02O-AAT
MEASUREMENT
177.1 (4500)
71.5 (1820)
65.2(1655)/67.3(1710)*
65.9(1675)/68.1(1730)*
103.1 (2620)
60.6 (1540)
60.6 (1540)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheel base
Wheel tread Front
Rear
Tire pressur
30 (207)
Tire
Standard
ItemBattery
Generator
2.4 DOHC 2.7 V6
110A (13.5 V)
psi
Size
225/70 R16
3.5 V6
120A (13.5
MF 68 AH (12 V)
2WD
4WD
* With roof rack
in. (mm)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 243/253
J060A01O-AAT
FUEL SYSTEM
J050A01O-AAT
BRAKEType
Wheel free play
Rack stroke
Oil pump type
Rack and pinion
0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)
5.5 in. (142 mm)
Vane type
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Ventilated disc
Disc type
Cable operated on rear wheel
Type
Front brake type
Rear brake type
Parking brake
19 us.gal (15.8 imp.gal, 72 liter)Fuel tank capacity
VEHICLE SPECIF
ENGINE
3.5 V6
6-Cyl., V-type DOHC
3.66 x 3.38 (93 x 85.8)
213.4 (3,497)
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
BTDC 10° 5°
J070A02O-AAT
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x Stroke in. (mm)
Displacement cu.in. (cc)
Firing order
Spark plug
Idle speed (rpm) - N, D, A/C OFF
Ignition timing (base)
2.4 DOHC
4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
3.41 x 3.94 (86.5 x 100)
143.5 (2,351)
1 - 3 - 4 - 2
CHAMPION : RN10PYP4
NGK : PGR5C-11
800 ± 100
BTDC 7° 5°
2.7 V6
6-Cyl., V-type DOHC
3.41 x 2.95 (86.7 x 75)
162.1 (2,656)
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
BTDC 12° 5°
SPECIFICATIONS
0.039 - 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)
Type
Gap
CHAMPION : RC10PYPB4
NGK : PFR5N-11
700 ± 100
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 244/253
BTDC 10° ± 5°Ignition timing (base)
Oil grade (API)
BTDC 7° ± 5° BTDC 12° ± 5°
SH, SG or SG/CD and ABOVE multigrade and fuel-efficient oil
9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4LUBRICATION CHART
J080A04O-AAT
Oil & Coolant Standard
API SH, Hot Climate : SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 (ABOVE 32°F or 0°C)
SG or Normal Climate : SAE 10W-30 10W-40, 10W-50 (ABOVE -10°F or -23°C)
SG/CD Cold Climate : SAE 5W-30 5W-40 (BELOW 100°F or 38°C)
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF, DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
PSF 3 type fluid
ITEM
Engine
Transaxle Manual
Auto
Coolant
Transfer case
Rear axle
Power steering
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 245/253
PSF-3 type fluid
DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent
Power steering
Brakes and clutch fluid
VEHICLE SPECIF
2.43 (2.02, 2.3)
7.4 (6.16, 7.0)
0 95 (0 79 0 9)
8.98 (7.48, 8.5)
0.85 (0.7, 0.8)
1.16 (0.97,1.1)
ITEM
Engine
Transaxle Manual
Auto
Coolant
Transfer case
Rear axle
Power steering
J080A04O-AAT
2.4 DOHC
Drain & refill;
Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4.0)
With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)
2.7 V6
Drain & refill;
Without oil filter : 4.44 (3.7, 4.2)
With oil filter : 4.76 (3.96, 4.5)
3.5 V6
Drain & refill;
Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4.
With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)
-
8.66 (7.21, 8.2)
1 06 (0 88 1 0)
Quantity (US. QTS) (lmp.qts, liter)
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 246/253
0.95 (0.79, 0.9)Power steering
Brakes and clutch fluid
1.06 (0.88, 1.0)
As required
10
INDEX
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 247/253
10
10 INDEX
2
A
Air bag ............................................................................................... 1-31
Air Cleaner Filter ...............................................................................6-12
Air Conditioning
Care .............................................................................................. 6-18
Operation ............................................................................ 1-85, 6-18
Switch ...........................................................................................1-84
Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-123
Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-55
Audio System
Cassete tape player operation (D-285) ................................... 1-106
Compact disc player operation (H260) .......................................1-99Compact disc player operation (D-285)................................... 1-110
Compact disc player operation (D-295)................................... 1-116
Stereo radio operation (H260) .....................................................1-96
Stereo radio operation (D-285) ................................................ 1-103
Stereo radio operation (D-295) ................................................ 1-113
B
C
Calendar ..........................................................................................
Care of Cassette Tapes ................................................................
Care of Disc ...................................................................................
Cargo Security Screen ...................................................................
Catalytic Converter .........................................................................
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock.....................................................
Child Restraint System ...................................................................
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System ...................................................
Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System ..
Cigarette Lighter ..............................................................................Clock ...............................................................................................
Clutch
Checking fluid .............................................................................
Pedal free-play ...........................................................................
Combination Light
Auto light ......................................................................................
H dli ht fl h
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 248/253
B
Battery ..................................................................................... 2-23, 6-22
Brake
Anti-lock brake system................................................................2-15
Brake traction control system (BTCS)........................................2-15
Checking the brakes....................................................................6-16
Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-16
Pedal clearance ...........................................................................6-20
Pedal free-play .............................................................................6-19
Practices ......................................................................................2-21
Breaking-In your New Hyundai ..........................................................1-3
Headlight flasher ........................................................................
Headlight switch .........................................................................
High-beam switch ......................................................................
Lane change signal ....................................................................
Parking light auto off ...................................................................
Turn signal operation .................................................................
Consumer Information ....................................................................
Cooling Fans ...................................................................................
Corrosion protection
Cleaning the interior .......................................................................4-5
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .......................................4-2
Washing and waxing ......................................................................4-3
Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-75
D
Defrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-87
Door
Central door lock ............................................................................1-7
Door locks ......................................................................................1-4
Front door edge warning light ......................................................1-74Locking, unlocking front door with a key ......................................1-5
Drink Holder ......................................................................................1-55
Drive Belts .........................................................................................6-20
Driving
Driving for economy.....................................................................2-22
Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-23
Winter dri ing 2 23
If the engine overheats ..............................................................
Number .......................................................................................
Oil ...............................................................................................
Starting .......................................................................................
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ..............................................
F
Fan Speed Control ..........................................................................
Floor Mat Anchor ............................................................................
Fog Light
Front ...........................................................................................
Front Seats Adjustable front seats ................................................................
Adjustable headrests ..................................................................
Adjusting seat forward and rearward ........................................
Adjusting seatback angle ...........................................................
Fuel
Auto fuel cut switch ....................................................................
Capacit
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 249/253
Winter driving ...............................................................................2-23
E
Emission Control System ...................................................................7-2
Engine
Before starting the engine..............................................................2-3
Compartment (2.4 DOHC) ............................................................6-2
Compartment (2.7 V6) ...................................................................6-3
Compartment (3.5 V6) ...................................................................6-4
Coolant ...........................................................................................6-8
Coolant temperature gauge .........................................................1-46
Capacity .....................................................................................
Gauge .........................................................................................
Recommendations .....................................................................
Fuel Filler Lid
Remote release..........................................................................
Full-time 4WD Operation ................................................................
Fuses ..............................................................................................
G
General Checks ..............................................................................
Glove Box ........................................................................................
10 INDEX
4
H
Hazard Warning System ..................................................................1-52
Heating and Cooling Control .............................................................1-78
Heating and Ventilation
Air flow control ..............................................................................1-80
Air intake control switch ...............................................................1-79
Bi-level heating .............................................................................1-84
Defrosting / Defogging .................................................................1-87
Fan speed control (Blower control) .............................................1-79
Temperature control ....................................................................1-83
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................................... 1-71
Homelink Mirror .................................................................................1-64Hood Release....................................................................................1-72
Horn ................................................................................................. 1-75
I
Ignition Switch......................................................................................2-4
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ................................. 1-38, 1-40
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) 1 54
L
Light Bulbs Replacement ................................................................
Limited-Slip Differential ....................................................................
Luggage Compartment Light ..........................................................
Luggage Net ....................................................................................
M
Maintenance Intervals
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...........................
Maintenance under severe usage conditions...........................
Scheduled maintenance ............................................................
Service requirements ................................................................Mirrors
Day-night inside rearview mirror ...............................................
Outside rearview mirror .............................................................
O
Odometer / Trip Odometer .............................................................
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 250/253
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat).......................................1-54
Interior Light .......................................................................................1-59
J
Jump Starting ......................................................................................3-2
K
Keys ...................................................................................................1-3
If you lose your keys ...................................................................3-13
Positions .........................................................................................2-4
P
Parking Brake..................................................................................
Power Driver's Seat ........................................................................
Power Outlet....................................................................................
Power Steering Fluid Level .............................................................
R
Rear Seat
Adjusting seatback angle .............................................................1-16
Folding rear seatback and seat cushion ....................................1-17
Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................1-52
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................................................8-8
Roof Rack .........................................................................................1-70
S
Seat
Front .............................................................................................1-11
Rear .............................................................................................. 1-16Seat warmer .................................................................................1-16
Seat Belts
3-point system .............................................................................1-21
2-point static type .........................................................................1-23
Pretensioner seat belt ..................................................................1-29
Adjusting your seat belt ..................................................... 1-23, 1-24
Care of seat belts 1-20
Steering Wheel Free play ...............................................................
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever ................................................................
Stereo Sound System .....................................................................
Sunroof ............................................................................................
Sun Visor .........................................................................................
T
Tachometer .....................................................................................
Tail Gate ..........................................................................................
Tail gate window.........................................................................
Theft-Alarm System ........................................................................
TiresBalancing ....................................................................................
Chains ........................................................................................
Changing a flat tire .....................................................................
If you have a flat tire ...................................................................
Information ..................................................................................
Pressure .....................................................................................
Replacement
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 251/253
Care of seat belts .........................................................................1-20
Precautions .................................................................................. 1-18
Shop Manual ........................................................................................8-5
Sound
Brake pad warning sound ............................................................ 1-45
Parking start warning sound ........................................................1-45
Spark Plugs .......................................................................................6-10
Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-60
Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-47
Starting Procedure ..............................................................................2-5
Replacement ..............................................................................
Rotation ......................................................................................
Snow tires...................................................................................
Spare tire ....................................................................................
Traction ......................................................................................
Towing
A trailer (or vehicle)....................................................................
Emergency .................................................................................
If your car must be towed ..........................................................
Traction Control System ....................................................... 2-15 ~
10 INDEX
6
Transaxle
Automatic.............................................................................. 2-8, 2-11
Automatic transaxle fluid checking ..............................................6-14
Manual ............................................................................................2-6
Manual transaxle oil checking .....................................................6-13
V
Vehicle Identification Number .............................................................8-2
Vehicle Specifications
Engine .............................................................................................9-3
Lubrication chart .................................................................. 9-4 ~ 9-5
Measurement .................................................................................9-2
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................................1-42
Windows
Power ...........................................................................................1-10
Windshield Wiper and Washer..........................................................1-50
Tail gate wiper and washer switch 1-51
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 252/253
Tail gate wiper and washer switch ..............................................1 51
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................................................................6-12
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
FUEL:UNLEADED gasoline only
Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 19 (15.8, 72)
TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.
OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-7.
HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.
ENGINE OIL:
MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4) Oil
should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the select
through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then ch
level of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUIN
available at your dealer or DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF S
QUICK INDEX
o Car will not start .......................................................................o Flat tire .....................................................................................
o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................1-42 ~ 1
o Engine overheats ......................................................................
o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3
o Starting the engine ...................................................................
o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ..........................
5/10/2018 2004 Hyundai Santa Fe Owners Manual - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2004-hyundai-santa-fe-owners-manual 253/253
Seoul Korea
Printing: MAR. 16, 2004
Publication No.: A26O-EU4
Printed in Korea
ENGINE OIL:API grade SH, SG or SG/CD multigrade and fuel efficient oil. Use SAE
10W-30, 10W-40 or 10W-50 if normal temperatures are above -10°F
(-23°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-6 or 9-4.
g p
o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................
o Reporting safety defects ...........................................................